<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mathias</id>
	<title>WICE Wiki v2.93 - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Mathias"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php/Special:Contributions/Mathias"/>
	<updated>2026-05-28T21:04:42Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.44.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3883</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3883"/>
		<updated>2025-04-25T07:56:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU Hardware Platform */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61)&lt;br /&gt;
* SETEK HMX &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has the following communication interfaces (some of which are optional):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a point-to-point (ppp) interface using a 2G/3G/4G mobile data modem&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, a WiFi wireless LAN interface&lt;br /&gt;
* one to four wired ethernet interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* two to six Controller Area Network (CAN) interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally a FlexRay interface&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, one or more LIN interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* one to two USB interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following storage mechanisms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* internal flash memory for persistent storage&lt;br /&gt;
* removable SD card for temporary storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following power modes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* running (full functionality available)&lt;br /&gt;
* sleep (suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
* deep sleep (low-power suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* File fetcher&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. The read-out can be done either using an in-vehicle DLT daemon, or using UDS Service 38 file transfer. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The File Fetcher module supports uploading of files collected from a unit connected to the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IPEmotion RT ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module makes it possible to use an IPEmotion RT data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the logger and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MQTT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The MQTT module makes it possible to collect data from another system using an MQTT broker and specifying MQTT topics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3869</id>
		<title>New features in v2.93</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.93&amp;diff=3869"/>
		<updated>2025-03-06T11:48:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for using labels to control permissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to select resources by labels as an alternative to select resources manually when selecting resources for a permission in [[Roles and permissions]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels in permissions1.png|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Permission label2.png|thumb|Select resources by labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
When a label is selected as in the screenshot to the right, the WCUs which are currently associated with the label are added to the set of selected resources. Multiple labels can also be used to either collect more resources or narrow down the resources depending on the chosen relation between the labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the permission has been saved, any additional resources which get associated with the labels used in the permission will automatically be added to the permission. Since these labels now controls one or many permissions, only the users with the role admin can add or remove the labels from resources as long as they are part of any permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for impersonating another user ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonate user.png|thumb|Impersonate user]]&lt;br /&gt;
An admin user can impersonate another user by selecting a user in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The_User_Tab]] and click the new button &amp;quot;Impersonate&amp;quot; as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonate user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Impersonating user.png|thumb|Impersonating user]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the button has been clicked, the portal will be reloaded and once logged in again you are now impersonating the selected user. See screenshot &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To stop impersonating, one can either click the new &amp;quot;Stop impersonating user&amp;quot; icon next to the red text &amp;quot;Impersonating user&amp;quot; or click the logout icon in the upper right corner of the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Platform types in WMUs ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Selected platform for new WMU.png|thumb|Select platform for new WMU]]&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a new WMU via the portal GUI it is now mandatory to select the platform for the new WMU as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Select platform for new WMU&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the WMU is running WMU version 3.0.0 or above it will also report its platform back to the portal. In the case the reported platform does not match the selected platform a warning will be shown and the selected platform must be changed to the reported before the WCU configuration can be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reported WMU platform does not match selected2.png|thumb|Reported WMU platform does not match selected]]&lt;br /&gt;
See screenshot &amp;quot;Reported WMU platform does not match selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for moving a vehicle to a resource group when applying a vehicle template ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to move a vehicle into a resource group with the help of vehicle templates. For more detailed information on how to use this feature, you can read more [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for MDF file recovery after a WCU crash ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyFileToAllVehicles.png|thumb|Apply File To all Vehicles]]&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.93, the WCU can recover Signal Reader measurement data after a crash or similar unexpected shut-down. To enable this, there is a new checkbox called &#039;Recover MDF files after unexpected shutdowns&#039; in theSignal Reader module settings. If the checkbox is checked and the WCU crashes, MDF signal data will be recovered  from the temporary signal data storage on the WCU the next time the WCU is started. The recovered MDF file is uploaded to the WICE back-end. Pre-trig logging is not possible to recover.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3868</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3868"/>
		<updated>2025-03-06T11:34:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* DLT module */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has the following communication interfaces (some of which are optional):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a point-to-point (ppp) interface using a 2G/3G/4G mobile data modem&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, a WiFi wireless LAN interface&lt;br /&gt;
* one to four wired ethernet interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* two to six Controller Area Network (CAN) interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally a FlexRay interface&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, one or more LIN interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* one to two USB interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following storage mechanisms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* internal flash memory for persistent storage&lt;br /&gt;
* removable SD card for temporary storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following power modes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* running (full functionality available)&lt;br /&gt;
* sleep (suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
* deep sleep (low-power suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* File fetcher&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. The read-out can be done either using an in-vehicle DLT daemon, or using UDS Service 38 file transfer. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The File Fetcher module supports uploading of files collected from a unit connected to the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IPEmotion RT ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module makes it possible to use an IPEmotion RT data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the logger and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MQTT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The MQTT module makes it possible to collect data from another system using an MQTT broker and specifying MQTT topics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3867</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3867"/>
		<updated>2025-03-06T11:33:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU has the following communication interfaces (some of which are optional):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a point-to-point (ppp) interface using a 2G/3G/4G mobile data modem&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, a WiFi wireless LAN interface&lt;br /&gt;
* one to four wired ethernet interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
* two to six Controller Area Network (CAN) interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally a FlexRay interface&lt;br /&gt;
* optionally, one or more LIN interfaces&lt;br /&gt;
* one to two USB interfaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following storage mechanisms:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* internal flash memory for persistent storage&lt;br /&gt;
* removable SD card for temporary storage&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The unit has the following power modes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* running (full functionality available)&lt;br /&gt;
* sleep (suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
* deep sleep (low-power suspended state)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* File fetcher&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The File Fetcher module supports uploading of files collected from a unit connected to the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IPEmotion RT ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module makes it possible to use an IPEmotion RT data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the logger and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MQTT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The MQTT module makes it possible to collect data from another system using an MQTT broker and specifying MQTT topics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Cybersecurity&amp;diff=3839</id>
		<title>WICE Cybersecurity</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Cybersecurity&amp;diff=3839"/>
		<updated>2025-02-19T11:38:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: Created page with &amp;quot;WICE has a large number of cybersecurity mechanisms implemented in response to threats. Threats are identified in a TARA procedure and potential weaknesses in WICE are addressed.  Alkit maintains a publicly accessible Vulnerability disclosure programme that allows for the disclosure of Vulnerabilities discovered by researchers and other external actors or entities. Contact [https://www.alkit.se/index.php/contacts Alkit Communications] to receive information required to u...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;WICE has a large number of cybersecurity mechanisms implemented in response to threats. Threats are identified in a TARA procedure and potential weaknesses in WICE are addressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alkit maintains a publicly accessible Vulnerability disclosure programme that allows for the disclosure of Vulnerabilities discovered by researchers and other external actors or entities. Contact [https://www.alkit.se/index.php/contacts Alkit Communications] to receive information required to utilise the disclosure programme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WICE Cybersecurity Approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
The high level approach is to secure the back-end and the WCUs and provide a secure channel between them to ensure confidentiality and integrity of the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Access control mechanism ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system has a comprehensive Access Control framework (configured in the WICE Portal) to control which user has access to which WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Secure communication mechanism ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system relies on a secure communication mechanism based on TLS 1.3 and a PKI for communication between WCUs and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU communicates with the WICE-back-end using the secure TLS-based tunnel, allowing configurations of the WCUs. The access control of the PKI solution is based on X.509 certificates identifying the endpoints of communication (WCU and WICE back-end). Only WCUs with a valid certificate can connect to the WICE back-end and is therefore an access control mechanism that ensures only authorised WICE users can access a WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Authentication mechanism ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system authenticates all users when logging in to the WICE Portal front-end user interface. A role-based access control framework is used to configure which WICE user has access to different resources, including WCUs. A specific user that has been assigned credentials to a specific WCU can then access the WCU by means of the secure TLS-based connection between the WCU and the back-end, provided the WCU is properly configured and authenticated through the PKI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Secure update mechanism ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system supports remote updates of the WCU software, including firmware. The software update mechanism allows an authenticated WICE user with the proper access rights to select a new software version to be installed on one or more WCUs through the WICE Portal user interface. The selected software will be downloaded to the WCU(s) over a secure channel (TLS tunnel), verified for integrity, and installed on the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Resilience mechanism ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system uses resilience mechanisms to mitigate the effects of Denial of Service (DoS) Attacks on the network interfaces of the WCU and return the WCU to a defined state after the attack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Input validation ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system validates all input received via external interfaces if the input has potential impact on security assets and/or network assets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vulnerability Monitoring ===&lt;br /&gt;
Alkit maintains a publicly accessible Vulnerability disclosure programme that allows for the disclosure of Vulnerabilities discovered by researchers and other external actors or entities. Contact [https://www.alkit.se/index.php/contacts Alkit Communications] to receive information required to utilise the disclosure programme.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_authentication_token&amp;diff=3742</id>
		<title>WCU authentication token</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_authentication_token&amp;diff=3742"/>
		<updated>2024-11-29T13:11:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;float:right; margin-left: 10px;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU version&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| 2.46 and later&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU configuration (reached via the [[Vehicles|Vehicles panel]]) contains the possibility to administer the WCU authentication token used for USB sticks on the WCU.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &#039;&#039;&#039;New UUID&#039;&#039;&#039; button, shown in the Figure &amp;quot;WCU Configuration: Authentication Token&amp;quot;, to generate such an authentication token. Remember to click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039; to save the generated token.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the generated token for data offload to a USB stick, put the token in a file called wice-access-token.txt i a directory called /wice/wcu_id, for instance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;/wice/04-1B-94-00-1D-2A/wice-access-token.txt&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a USB stick thus prepared is inserted in a WCU with the corresponding id, data will be offloaded to the USB stick. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WcuConfigAuthToken.png|left|thumb|WCU Configuration: Authentication Token]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3683</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3683"/>
		<updated>2024-09-05T11:53:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU Modules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* File fetcher&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* MQTT&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The File Fetcher module supports uploading of files collected from a unit connected to the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IPEmotion RT ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module makes it possible to use an IPEmotion RT data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the logger and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== MQTT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The MQTT module makes it possible to collect data from another system using an MQTT broker and specifying MQTT topics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3682</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Trigger Expressions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3682"/>
		<updated>2024-08-28T06:43:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Trigger conditions are expressions evaluated by the Signal Reader module to control when recorders are started and stopped and when measurement set-up switches are performed.&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger conditions are boolean expressions, evaluated to either true or false. A number of operators can be combined to form the trigger expression. The allowed operators in trigger expressions are shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for equality. Syntax: expression = expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for inequality. Syntax: expression != expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!AND&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical conjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression AND boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!OR&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical disjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression OR boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!NOT&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical negation of boolean expression. Syntax: NOT(boolean expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_FROM_TO&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes from the specified value to the other specified value. Syntax: CHANGE_FROM_TO(Signal, value, value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the specified signal is greater than zero. Syntax: TIMER(signal, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EXPR_TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the condition is fulfilled. Syntax: EXPR_TIMER(expression, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIME_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the time elapsed while the supplied boolean expression has been true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: TIME_COUNTER(expression) or TIME_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!SAMPLE_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the number of samples received while the boolean expression is true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression) or SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EVERY&lt;br /&gt;
|Repeatedly becomes true after a time interval, specified in seconds, has elapsed. Syntax: EVERY(time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MOVAV&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates a moving average over the specified signal. Syntax: MOVAV(Signal)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!ABS&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the absolute value of the specified expression. Syntax: ABS(expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MIN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the minimum value of two expressions. Syntax: MIN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MAX&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the maximum value of two expressions. Syntax: MAX(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MEAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the mean value of two expressions. Syntax: MEAN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!LOSS_OF_SIGNAL&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal disappears for the specified number of seconds. Syntax: LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(Signal, seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.87&amp;diff=3557</id>
		<title>New features in v2.87</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.87&amp;diff=3557"/>
		<updated>2024-01-03T14:16:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Initial Support for MDF Version 4.1 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Support for Vehicle Communication Forwarder ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled in the Portal, it is now possible to add and configure a Vehicle Communication Forwarder to a WCU from Edit Configuration under the  [[I/O configurations#Add CAN channels|I/O Configuration tab]]. If both WMUs and Vehicle Communication Forwarder are enabled in the portal, only Vehicle Communication Forwarder will be shown. Read more about Vehicle Communication Forwarder [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assignment Review Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
When having assignments that are delicate in the sense that those will be run on many vehicles or of other reasons, there is now support to appoint one or several reviewers of the assignment. Those reviewers can then approve or reject the assignment for the original editor to fix any problems. In addition to the review process of assignments, there is support to require that only reviewed assignments can be added to resource groups or WCU:s. Read more about the review process [[Review assignment process|here]] and how to enforce that reviewed assignments on resources for WCUs [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice287/index.php/The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_WCU_Dialog here] and resource groups [[The Portal Administrator View#Approved Assignments|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Initial Support for MDF Version 4.1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is support to search and download MDF files for version 4.1 in the result files panel. Support to preview such files will come later. In the WCU software, there is support for generating MDF files of version 4.1.1, in addition to the previously available 3.x versions. The MDF version is selected in the module settings for Signal Reader.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved Handling of Default Resource Group Labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
Possible to select if default label should remove from the WCU or/and Vehicle when disconnecting from the group. Also possible to default labels will affect current resources in the resource group. Read more [[Edit default labels window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for Assignment Validation ==&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a signal reader assignment in the editor it is possible to make some common mistake that can affect the vehicle&#039;s behavior. If the user tries to save an assignment with this type of mistake the user will be informed and then take action after it. Read more about signal reader editor [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Record Result Files Announced to Third Parties ==&lt;br /&gt;
A column named &#039;Announced On&#039; has been added in the result files panel to track when the result file was announced. Additionally, two labels have been introduced on the task to monitor the number of announced files called &#039;announced_files&#039; and the date of the last announcement called &#039;announced_on&amp;quot;. These labels are visible in the tasks panel. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice287/index.php/Creating_a_Task#Announce_result_file_availability here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to Edit Values on Labels on Tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
When an assignment is generated with associated labels, it is now possible to modify the values of these labels in the View Task window. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice287/index.php/Tasks_Tab#Task_Options here]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU Connected Column in Vehicles Panel has Better Mixed Time Format ==&lt;br /&gt;
The column &#039;Connected&#039; in the Vehicles panel has an improved time format presentation. Earlier, it simply showed the number of minutes since a WCU last connected to the portal. This quickly became difficult to use and you had to move the pointer over the cell in order to get a hover message saying the actual date. Now, a mixed format based on how long the WCU connected with the portal is used. Up to a month since the last connected time is shown as, e.g. &#039;7d3h11m&#039;. When the time exceeds a month, the date is shown. Also, filtering is made using the format &#039;7d3h11m&#039;. Read more about this here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for New Permission to Create Vehicles ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is now a Vehicle Create Permission, which enables non-admin users to create vehicles in the vehicles tab. Additionally, vehicles without a WCU connected will now show up in the vehicles tab for users with this permission. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about creating vehicles [[The Portal Administrator View#Add Vehicle Dialog|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for New Permission to Connect/Disconnect WCU:s and Vehicles in the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
There is now a WCU Connect Permission, which enables non-admin users to connect WCUs to vehicles. Read more about connecting WCUs to vehicles [[The Portal Administrator View#The Administration Tab|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved Task Search Performance ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under some circumstances the search i the tasks panel could be lagging for a few seconds and this is now improved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CAN-FD Support ==&lt;br /&gt;
The assignment editor now has support for CAN-FD.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader New Type of Triggers are Introduced ==&lt;br /&gt;
A trigger in signal reader can now run the following events: Recorder (old), Setup switch (old), Pause diagnostics, Start/Stop CCP/XCP DAQ, Upload. Read more about triggers [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved Resource Groups Table under the Administration Tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
Resource group table has been extended with new columns that control if Require approved assignments and shows the number of resources and labels. It is also possible to filter on strict and nonstrict and a counter has been added in the header.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3414</id>
		<title>WICE Internal Signals</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3414"/>
		<updated>2023-08-24T08:15:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following WICE-internal signals are supported by Signal Reader:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_X&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the X direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. (See [[WICE Accelerometer]].) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Y&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Y direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. (See [[WICE Accelerometer]].) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Z&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Z direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. (See [[WICE Accelerometer]].) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 1 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 2 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Busload_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The bus load on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Connectivity&lt;br /&gt;
|The current connectivity of the WCU (0 = unknown, 1 = none, 2 = 2G, 3 = 3G, 4 = 4G, 5=5G, 6=WiFi, 7=ethernet) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CSQ&lt;br /&gt;
|The built-in modem&#039;s CSQ value (Signal Quality)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Year&lt;br /&gt;
|The year of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Month&lt;br /&gt;
|The month (1-12) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Day&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the month (1-31) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Weekday&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the week (1-7, where 1 is Sunday). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Hour&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour of the day (0-23). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Minute&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute of the hour (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Second&lt;br /&gt;
|The second of the minute (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Dynamic_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Special signals with values assignable from external software components (typically used for Rapid Prototyping).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__AI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Analog input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DO_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital output number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_FlexRay_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on Flexray bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication) interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication)  interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Power_Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|The power mode of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated once, at program start&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated at each measurement set-up switch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal&lt;br /&gt;
|The start signal of the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The voltage of the start signal of the WCU, in millivolts &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The start switch of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tester_Present&lt;br /&gt;
|When present in a measurement set-up, a Tester Present diagnostic request (with suppress Positive Response bit set) will be sent periodically.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Epoch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the epoch (Jan 1, 1970, 00:00) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the start of the task &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the activation of the current measurement set-up &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trigger_Button&lt;br /&gt;
|The trigger button connected to the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_CPU&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU CPU usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_Memory&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU memory usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 1 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 2 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Battery&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU battery voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Temp&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU internal temperature in degrees Celsius&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Storage&lt;br /&gt;
|The available storage on the WCU in percent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Accelerometer&amp;diff=3413</id>
		<title>WICE Accelerometer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Accelerometer&amp;diff=3413"/>
		<updated>2023-08-24T08:13:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: Created page with &amp;quot;The WICE-internal signals for the built-in accelerometer, WICE.Accelerometer_X, WICE.Accelerometer_X and WICE.Accelerometer_Z are oriented as in the below picture.  Orientation of the axes of the built-in accelerometer&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The WICE-internal signals for the built-in accelerometer, WICE.Accelerometer_X, WICE.Accelerometer_X and WICE.Accelerometer_Z are oriented as in the below picture. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WICE Accelerometer.png|thumb|Orientation of the axes of the built-in accelerometer]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=File:WICE_Accelerometer.png&amp;diff=3412</id>
		<title>File:WICE Accelerometer.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=File:WICE_Accelerometer.png&amp;diff=3412"/>
		<updated>2023-08-24T08:12:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Orientation of the axes of the built-in accelerometer&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_RP_How-To&amp;diff=3411</id>
		<title>WICE RP How-To</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_RP_How-To&amp;diff=3411"/>
		<updated>2023-08-21T12:11:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Getting Started with WICE Rapid Prototyping = &lt;br /&gt;
To get started developing an RP component to be run on a WICE WCU you need the following:&lt;br /&gt;
* A toolchain for building executable programs on the target WCU platform&lt;br /&gt;
* A set of libraries providing APIs to the WCU hardware platform resources (e.g. CAN, diagnostics, logging, etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* A high-level, socket based, Signal Broker API simplifying access to in-vehicle signals.&lt;br /&gt;
* WICE Portal access to configure the RP module for one or more WCUs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Software Development Toolchain ==&lt;br /&gt;
The development toolchain is typically installed on a desktop Linux system and then executables are built by cross-compilation.&lt;br /&gt;
The following WCU platform architectures are supported:&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4: ARM Cortex A9 or Cortex A5 processor, 32 bit&lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom Committo: ARM 926EJ-S processor, 32 bit &lt;br /&gt;
* Actia Platform: MIPS processor, 32 bit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All toolchains are gcc-based.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX-4 toolchain is availble here: https://www.alkit.se/pub/gcc-linaro-arm-linux-gnueabihf-2012.09-20120921_linux.tar.gz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WICE RP development API libraries ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following libraries are available:&lt;br /&gt;
* Canwrapper CAN library&lt;br /&gt;
* Debug logging library&lt;br /&gt;
* Timers and utilities library&lt;br /&gt;
* Tactalib Diagnostics library&lt;br /&gt;
* OBD II library&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The development libraries are available here: https://www.alkit.se/rp/libs/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you do not need these libraries when using the high-level Signal Broker API (the preferred approach), described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Building and executing the RP program =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The binary file resulting from compiling the program for the target WCU platform is transferred to one or more in-vehicle WCUs using the WICE Portal. The binary will be executed&lt;br /&gt;
when the WCU boots, and will be terminated when the WCU shuts down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When executed, an number of command line arguments are given to the RP binary, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
-vin &amp;lt;VIN number&amp;gt; -settings &amp;lt;filename&amp;gt; -logfile &amp;lt;filename&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-vin&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; parameter supplies the Vehicle Identification Number of the vehicle the WCU is installed in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-settings&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; parameter supplies the path to a configuration file the user can supply through the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;-logfile&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; parameter supplies the path to a debug log file which will be uploaded to WICE portal when the RP module exits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To get access to the information supplied on the command line at start-up, the RP program must parse the command line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= A simple example RP program =&lt;br /&gt;
The example code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;rpex.c&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; illustrates how to write a small program that can be executed as an RP module on the WICE in-vehicle WCU platform. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The example shows how to read a configuration file supplied on the command line, to write a CAN diagnostic request on a CAN bus and read a diagnostic reply, and to log data to a log file that will be uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The full source code of rpex is available [https://www.alkit.se/rp/example/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first thing the example program does is to parse the command line parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ret = parse_options(argc, argv);&lt;br /&gt;
  if (ret != 1) {&lt;br /&gt;
    return EXIT_FAILURE;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;parse_options&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; function sets the variables &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;settings_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;log_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;vin&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; to the strings supplied on the command line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, debug output is enabled, and the output filename is set to &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;log_filename&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, as specified on the command line. This ensures that the log file will be uploaded to the WICE Portal when rpex exits.&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;debug_enable&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;debug_msg&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; functions are defined in the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;alkit-debug&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; development library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;if (log_filename != NULL ) {&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_enable(log_filename);&lt;br /&gt;
 }&lt;br /&gt;
 debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;rpex version is %s\n&amp;quot;, RPEX_VERSION_STRING);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, after some more log output, the settings file is read:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt; if(settings_filename)&lt;br /&gt;
    read_settings(settings_filename);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The settings file is the main way (except for the command line parameters) to provide input to the RP program. It can contain any type of input data needed by the program. In the example, rpex only reads text from the settings file and prints it to the output logfile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The program is now ready to do its main work,in this case to send a diagnostic request on a CAN bus, and read a response. This is done using the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;alkit-canwrapper&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; library.&lt;br /&gt;
The following code block shows how to set up the CAN interface, prepare a CAN frame for transmission, set up a CAN filter matching the expected response, and then send the CAN frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt; // Initialize CAN interface&lt;br /&gt;
  ret = init_can(canbus, DEFAULT_CAN_DEVICE);&lt;br /&gt;
  can_device_fd = get_can_fd(canbus);&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  // Set up CAN filter&lt;br /&gt;
  install_CAN_filter(canbus, 0, CAN_FILTER_TYPE_PASS, can_filter_id, can_filter_mask);&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  // Prepare CAN frame for request&lt;br /&gt;
  memset(&amp;amp;req_frame, 0, sizeof(candata_t));&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.id = ecu_id;&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.bus_nr = canbus;&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.frame_type = CAN_FRAME_11_BIT;&lt;br /&gt;
  memset(req_frame.databytes, 0, 8);&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.databytes[0] = 0x02; // SingleFrame, length = 2&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.databytes[1] = 0x10; // Service 10&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.databytes[2] = 0x01; // Default Diagnostic Session&lt;br /&gt;
  req_frame.databyte_count = 8; // With padding&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  // Send CAN frame&lt;br /&gt;
  debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Sending diagnostic request on CAN bus %d...\n&amp;quot;, canbus);&lt;br /&gt;
  n = write_can(canbus, &amp;amp;req_frame, &amp;amp;t);&lt;br /&gt;
  if(n&amp;lt;0) {&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Error writing CAN frame\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
    return -1;&lt;br /&gt;
  }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following code block shows how to read a response CAN frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;// Read CAN response&lt;br /&gt;
  FD_ZERO(&amp;amp;readfds);&lt;br /&gt;
  FD_SET(can_device_fd, &amp;amp;readfds);&lt;br /&gt;
  timeout.tv_sec = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
  timeout.tv_usec = 200000; // 200 ms&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  ready = select(FD_SETSIZE, &amp;amp;readfds, NULL, NULL, &amp;amp;timeout);&lt;br /&gt;
  if (ready &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
    ret = read_can(canbus, &amp;amp;resp_frame);&lt;br /&gt;
    if (ret == CAN_STATUS_OK) {&lt;br /&gt;
      // Read successful&lt;br /&gt;
      handle_can_frame(&amp;amp;resp_frame);&lt;br /&gt;
    } else {&lt;br /&gt;
      debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Error reading CAN frame\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  } else {&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;No response.\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
  }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The function &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;handle_can_frame&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;which is called when a frame is read simply logs the CAN identifier and payload to the logfile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Using the high-level API for reading in-vehicle signals =&lt;br /&gt;
To avoid the intricacies of reading CAN or FlexRay signals directly from the device, having to parse and interpret the signals, there is a high-level socket based API for reading in-vehicle and WICE-internal signals. The API is based on a publish/subscribe model, wherein the RP client subscribes to signals by name, and periodically gets signal values for the selected set of signals. The communication between the RP client and the WICE signal broker component is done over a socket.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The example code &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;rpex-pubsub.c&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; illustrates how to use the publish/subscribe API. The full source code is available [https://www.alkit.se/rp/example/ here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To set up the communication between the RP module and the signal broker, the example program calls a function called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;setup_pubsub_connection()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; after parsing the command line parameters:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;pubsub_socket = setup_pubsub_connection(ip_addr, port_num);&lt;br /&gt;
  if(pubsub_socket&amp;lt;0) {&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Pubsub connection failed\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
    exit(-1);&lt;br /&gt;
  }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;setup_pubsub_connection()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; function sets up a TCP socket to use for the communication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To this socket, a subscribe command is sent with a list of names of the signals to subscribe to. The syntax of the subscribe command is as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subscribe &amp;lt;signal name 1&amp;gt; &amp;lt;signal name 2&amp;gt; ...&amp;lt;signal name n&amp;gt;&amp;lt;CRLF&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the separator character has to be space, and the line terminated with Carriage Return + Line Feed (or optionally only Line Feed).&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;sprintf(str, &amp;quot;subscribe %s %s\n&amp;quot;, RPEX_SIGNAL1, RPEX_SIGNAL2);&lt;br /&gt;
  n = send(pubsub_socket, str, strlen(str), 0);&lt;br /&gt;
  if(n &amp;lt;= 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Error subscribing to signals\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
    exit(-1);&lt;br /&gt;
  }&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Once the signals have been subscribed, the signal broker will send the signal values on the socket, to be read by the RP program, with the following syntax:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;signal name&amp;gt; &amp;lt;value&amp;gt;&amp;lt;CRLF&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Again, the separator character between signal name and value is space.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following code segment show an example of how to read signals as the bcome available on the socket using the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;select()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; system call.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;while(count &amp;lt; 100) {&lt;br /&gt;
    FD_ZERO(&amp;amp;readfds);&lt;br /&gt;
    FD_SET(pubsub_socket, &amp;amp;readfds);&lt;br /&gt;
    timeout.tv_sec = 1;&lt;br /&gt;
    timeout.tv_usec = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
    ready = select(FD_SETSIZE, &amp;amp;readfds, NULL, NULL, &amp;amp;timeout);&lt;br /&gt;
    if (ready &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
      n = read_line(pubsub_socket, &amp;amp;buf);&lt;br /&gt;
      if (n &amp;gt; 0) {&lt;br /&gt;
        // Read successful&lt;br /&gt;
        handle_signal(buf);&lt;br /&gt;
        free(buf);&lt;br /&gt;
        count++;&lt;br /&gt;
      } else {&lt;br /&gt;
        debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;Error reading signal\n&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
        break;&lt;br /&gt;
      }&lt;br /&gt;
    }&lt;br /&gt;
  }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;read_line()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; helper function handles the actual reading of characters from the socket, and then the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;handle_signal()&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; function parses the signal names and values, as follows. &lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;void handle_signal(char *str) {&lt;br /&gt;
  char name[1000];&lt;br /&gt;
  float value;&lt;br /&gt;
  sscanf(str, &amp;quot;%s %f&amp;quot;, name, &amp;amp;value);&lt;br /&gt;
  if(strcmp(name, RPEX_SIGNAL1)==0)&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;The value of signal 1 is %f\n&amp;quot;, value);&lt;br /&gt;
  if(strcmp(name, RPEX_SIGNAL2)==0)&lt;br /&gt;
    debug_msg(1, &amp;quot;The value of signal 2 is %f\n&amp;quot;, value);&lt;br /&gt;
 }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The RP program can at any time unsubscribe to signals using the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;unsubscribe&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command, which has the same syntax as the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;subscribe&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;unsubscribe &amp;lt;signal name 1&amp;gt; &amp;lt;signal name 2&amp;gt; ...&amp;lt;signal name n&amp;gt;&amp;lt;CRLF&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
After unsubscribing to a (subset) of the subscribed signals, those signals&#039; values will no longer be transmitted on the socket. (This is not shown in the example.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The final part of the example shows how to terminate the subscription using the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;quit&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; command.&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;send(pubsub_socket, &amp;quot;quit&amp;quot;, 4, 0);&lt;br /&gt;
  close(pubsub_socket);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
As another example, the following Python code illustrates how to set up a socket connection th the Signal Broker, list the available signals, and subscribe to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 # Example showing how to read signals from WICE Signal Broker in Python&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 import socket&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 HOST = &amp;quot;127.0.0.1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 PORT = 31415&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 def read_line(sock):&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;read a line from a socket&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
    chars = []&lt;br /&gt;
    while True:&lt;br /&gt;
        a = sock.recv(1)&lt;br /&gt;
        chars.append(a)     &lt;br /&gt;
        if a == &amp;quot;\n&amp;quot; or a == &amp;quot;&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
            return &amp;quot;&amp;quot;.join(chars)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 def read_signals(sock):&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;read available signals&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
    sigs = []&lt;br /&gt;
    while True:&lt;br /&gt;
        line = read_line(sock)&lt;br /&gt;
        if line == &amp;quot;\n&amp;quot; or line == &amp;quot;\r\n&amp;quot; or line == &amp;quot;&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
            return sigs&lt;br /&gt;
        sigs.append(dict(name = line.strip(), value = 0.0))&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 def parse_signal(str):&lt;br /&gt;
    &amp;quot;parse  string into signal name tuple&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
    x = str.split()&lt;br /&gt;
    t = (x[0], x[1])&lt;br /&gt;
    return t&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 print(&amp;quot;Setting up socket connection to port %d...&amp;quot; % PORT)&lt;br /&gt;
 sock = socket.socket(socket.AF_INET, socket.SOCK_STREAM)&lt;br /&gt;
 sock.connect((HOST, PORT))&lt;br /&gt;
 # Get list of available signals&lt;br /&gt;
 sock.send(&amp;quot;list\n&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
 signals = read_signals(sock)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 print(&amp;quot;Available signals:&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
 print(signals)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 # Subscribe to signals&lt;br /&gt;
 for signal in signals:&lt;br /&gt;
    sock.send(&amp;quot;subscribe &amp;quot; + signal[&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;] + &amp;quot;\n&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
 while True:&lt;br /&gt;
    line = read_line(sock)&lt;br /&gt;
    t = parse_signal(line)&lt;br /&gt;
    for s in signals:&lt;br /&gt;
        if s[&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;] == t[0]:&lt;br /&gt;
            s.update({&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;: t[1]})&lt;br /&gt;
            break&lt;br /&gt;
    print(&amp;quot;Signal &amp;quot; + s[&amp;quot;name&amp;quot;] + &amp;quot;, value = &amp;quot; + str(s[&amp;quot;value&amp;quot;]))&lt;br /&gt;
 s.close()&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can find more information about the signal broker API in [[WICE Signal Broker API]] section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Rapid Prototyping using Node.js =&lt;br /&gt;
To develop Rapid Prototyping applications with graphical user interfaces, the [https://nodejs.org Node.js] framework can be used. Node.js is a cross-platform JavaScript run-time environment that executes JavaScript code on the server side. In the WICE RP concept, a Node.js application can be downloaded to a WCU where it is executed. The user interface developed can be accessed from a web browser connected to the WCU through Ethernet or WiFi. The setup described here is built with Node.js Express. However, other frameworks can be utilized using the same methodology, with small modifications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All written to consol.log() will be in a log-file called rp-webapp-&amp;lt;date&amp;gt;.log and uploaded and accessible in the WICE back end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following example demonstrates how to access vehicle signals from a Node.js application running on a WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Node.js application server set-up script, add the following code segment to include the Express framework and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;socket.io&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; handling socket communication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;// Setup server environment&lt;br /&gt;
 const express = require(&#039;express&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
 const app = express();&lt;br /&gt;
 const server = require(&#039;http&#039;).createServer(app);&lt;br /&gt;
 const io = require(&#039;socket.io&#039;)(server);&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 // Run internal util&lt;br /&gt;
 require(&#039;/path/to/script/socketHandler.js&#039;)(io)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;socketHandler.js&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; script contains the code that handles the socket communication, both with the web-client and with the WICE Signal Broker. The function waits for a client to connect, by accessing the web page. It then connects to the Signal Broker and subscribes to the desired signals (in this example Engine Speed and Vehicle Speed on the MS CAN bus). The application then listens for incoming messages on the connected socket and processes the data, i.e. signal names and values. The data is then transferred to the client by &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;socket.io&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; communication in order to present the information in the web-browser. An example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;socketHandler.js&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; script is outlined here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;const net = require(&#039;net&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
 const PORT = 31415;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 module.exports = function(io) {      &lt;br /&gt;
   io.on(&#039;connection&#039;, function(client) {  // Await client connection&lt;br /&gt;
       console.log(&#039;Client connected...&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
       // Setup TCP socket to Signal Broker.&lt;br /&gt;
       var tcpSocket = new net.Socket();&lt;br /&gt;
       tcpSocket.connect(PORT, &#039;localhost&#039;, function () {&lt;br /&gt;
           console.log(&#039;Connected to signal broker... &#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
           // Get a list of available signals (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
           tcpSocket.write(&#039;list\n&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
 		&lt;br /&gt;
           // Subscribe to desired signals. &lt;br /&gt;
           tcpSocket.write(&#039;subscribe CAN_MS.EngineSpeed CAN_MS.VehicleSpeed\n&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
       });&lt;br /&gt;
 	&lt;br /&gt;
      // Listener triggered by messages from sigread.      &lt;br /&gt;
     tcpSocket.on(&#039;data&#039;, function(message) {       &lt;br /&gt;
        console.log(message.toString());  &lt;br /&gt;
        // Handle received messages here...&lt;br /&gt;
     });&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
     // Triggered if the tcpSocket is closed.&lt;br /&gt;
     tcpSocket.on(&#039;close&#039;, function () {&lt;br /&gt;
           console.log(&#039;TCP connection closed!&#039;);&lt;br /&gt;
      });&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
     // Triggered upon error events.&lt;br /&gt;
     tcpSocket.on(&#039;error&#039;, function(error) {&lt;br /&gt;
           console.log(&#039;TCP error: %s&#039;, error);&lt;br /&gt;
      });&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
     // Triggered if the client refreshes or closes the page&lt;br /&gt;
      client.on(&#039;disconnect&#039;, function (){&lt;br /&gt;
           console.log(&amp;quot;Client disconnected&amp;quot;);  &lt;br /&gt;
           tcpSocket.destroy(); // Disconnect from Signal Broker&lt;br /&gt;
      });&lt;br /&gt;
   });  &lt;br /&gt;
 }&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each received message is a newline-terminated text line consisting of signal name followed by signal value, separated by a space character (see [[#Using the high-level API for reading in-vehicle signals|Signal Broker]] section above). The message is transferred to the client through socket communication established in the first part of the script above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Send data to client:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;client.emit(&#039;speed&#039;, speed);&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Receive data in HTML-embedded client script:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;// Setup client socket.&lt;br /&gt;
 var socket = io.connect(&#039;/&#039;); // url path for the current page&lt;br /&gt;
 socket.on(&#039;connect&#039;, function (data) {&lt;br /&gt;
      console.log(&amp;quot;Client connected to server&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
 });&lt;br /&gt;
 	&lt;br /&gt;
 // Triggered by ‘speed’ tagged messages from server.&lt;br /&gt;
 socket.on(&#039;speed&#039;, function (value) {&lt;br /&gt;
               console.log(value);&lt;br /&gt;
 });&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To transfer a Node web-app to one or more WCUs, it should be put in a zip file and uploaded to the WICE Portal as an RP module.&lt;br /&gt;
The zip file must have a top level directory called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;rp&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, and in this directory a Node application entry point file called &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;server.js&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A complete example of a Node web-application RP zip-file, including source code, is available for download [https://www.alkit.se/rp/node-example/ here].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3400</id>
		<title>New features in v2.84</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3400"/>
		<updated>2023-06-29T07:38:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU information panel extended with certificate expire date */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Context menu added for some plot options in the signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A context menu has been added in the signal preview when right clicking the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title.&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved tooltip when hovering over the plot ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
== Functionality added to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==&lt;br /&gt;
When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or the selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new &amp;quot;Add more files&amp;quot; button which takes you back where you can add new files in and also remove old files.&lt;br /&gt;
== Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==&lt;br /&gt;
The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.&lt;br /&gt;
== Allow more signals in signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of signals in a plot is now infinitely many signals in a single plot.&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU information panel extended with certificate expiry date ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU information panel now also shows the certificates expiry date. Hovering over the date will also show how many days left before the certificate expires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to have per-vehicle ECU PIN codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
For SWDL tasks there is now support to have ECU PIN codes per vehicle instead of just global ones for a task. See further in [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|ECU PIN codes for vehicles]] on how to prepare a vehicle with individual pin codes and on creating SWDL tasks [[Creating a Task#SWDL|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New Canrecorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new Canrecorder is introduced in 2.84 with design changes and some new settings like: trigger option and shot count. Read more [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder|here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New WICE-internal signals in Signal Reader ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new WICE-internal signals are introduced in introduced in 2.84: WICE.WCU_Storage, giving the available storage on the WCU in percent, and WICE.Connectivity, giving the current connectivity mode. Read more [[WICE_Internal_Signals|here.]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3399</id>
		<title>New features in v2.84</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3399"/>
		<updated>2023-06-29T07:38:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Support to have per vehicle ECU pin codes */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Context menu added for some plot options in the signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A context menu has been added in the signal preview when right clicking the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title.&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved tooltip when hovering over the plot ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
== Functionality added to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==&lt;br /&gt;
When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or the selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new &amp;quot;Add more files&amp;quot; button which takes you back where you can add new files in and also remove old files.&lt;br /&gt;
== Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==&lt;br /&gt;
The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.&lt;br /&gt;
== Allow more signals in signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of signals in a plot is now infinitely many signals in a single plot.&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU information panel extended with certificate expire date ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU information panel now also shows the certificates expiry date. Hovering over the date will also show how many days left before the certificate expires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to have per-vehicle ECU PIN codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
For SWDL tasks there is now support to have ECU PIN codes per vehicle instead of just global ones for a task. See further in [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|ECU PIN codes for vehicles]] on how to prepare a vehicle with individual pin codes and on creating SWDL tasks [[Creating a Task#SWDL|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New Canrecorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new Canrecorder is introduced in 2.84 with design changes and some new settings like: trigger option and shot count. Read more [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder|here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New WICE-internal signals in Signal Reader ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new WICE-internal signals are introduced in introduced in 2.84: WICE.WCU_Storage, giving the available storage on the WCU in percent, and WICE.Connectivity, giving the current connectivity mode. Read more [[WICE_Internal_Signals|here.]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3398</id>
		<title>New features in v2.84</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&amp;diff=3398"/>
		<updated>2023-06-29T07:37:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Context menu added for some plot options in the signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A context menu has been added in the signal preview when right clicking the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title.&lt;br /&gt;
== Improved tooltip when hovering over the plot ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
== Functionality added to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==&lt;br /&gt;
When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or the selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new &amp;quot;Add more files&amp;quot; button which takes you back where you can add new files in and also remove old files.&lt;br /&gt;
== Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==&lt;br /&gt;
The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.&lt;br /&gt;
== Allow more signals in signal preview ==&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of signals in a plot is now infinitely many signals in a single plot.&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU information panel extended with certificate expire date ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU information panel now also shows the certificates expiry date. Hovering over the date will also show how many days left before the certificate expires.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support to have per vehicle ECU pin codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
For SWDL tasks there is now support to have ECU pin codes per vehicle instead of just global ones for a task. See further in [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|ECU pin codes for vehicles]] on how to prepare a vehicle with individual pin codes and on creating SWDL tasks [[Creating a Task#SWDL|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New Canrecorder ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new Canrecorder is introduced in 2.84 with design changes and some new settings like: trigger option and shot count. Read more [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder|here.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New WICE-internal signals in Signal Reader ==&lt;br /&gt;
Two new WICE-internal signals are introduced in introduced in 2.84: WICE.WCU_Storage, giving the available storage on the WCU in percent, and WICE.Connectivity, giving the current connectivity mode. Read more [[WICE_Internal_Signals|here.]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3397</id>
		<title>WICE Internal Signals</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3397"/>
		<updated>2023-06-29T07:31:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following WICE-internal signals are supported by Signal Reader:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_X&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the X direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Y&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Y direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Z&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Z direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 1 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 2 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Busload_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The bus load on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Connectivity&lt;br /&gt;
|The current connectivity of the WCU (0 = unknown, 1 = none, 2 = 2G, 3 = 3G, 4 = 4G, 5=5G, 6=WiFi, 7=ethernet) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CSQ&lt;br /&gt;
|The built-in modem&#039;s CSQ value (Signal Quality)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Year&lt;br /&gt;
|The year of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Month&lt;br /&gt;
|The month (1-12) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Day&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the month (1-31) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Weekday&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the week (1-7, where 1 is Sunday). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Hour&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour of the day (0-23). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Minute&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute of the hour (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Second&lt;br /&gt;
|The second of the minute (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Dynamic_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Special signals with values assignable from external software components (typically used for Rapid Prototyping).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__AI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Analog input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DO_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital output number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_FlexRay_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on Flexray bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication) interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication)  interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Power_Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|The power mode of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated once, at program start&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated at each measurement set-up switch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal&lt;br /&gt;
|The start signal of the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The voltage of the start signal of the WCU, in millivolts &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The start switch of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tester_Present&lt;br /&gt;
|When present in a measurement set-up, a Tester Present diagnostic request (with suppress Positive Response bit set) will be sent periodically.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Epoch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the epoch (Jan 1, 1970, 00:00) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the start of the task &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the activation of the current measurement set-up &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trigger_Button&lt;br /&gt;
|The trigger button connected to the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_CPU&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU CPU usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_Memory&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU memory usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 1 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 2 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Battery&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU battery voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Temp&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU internal temperature in degrees Celsius&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Storage&lt;br /&gt;
|The available storage on the WCU in percent&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3271</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3271"/>
		<updated>2022-12-22T14:51:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU Modules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* File fetcher&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* IPEmotion RT&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The File Fetcher module supports uploading of files collected from a unit connected to the WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IPEmotion RT ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IPEmotion RT module makes it possible to use an IPEmotion RT data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the logger and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3270</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3270"/>
		<updated>2022-12-22T14:47:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU Modules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DLT&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DLT module supports read-out of Diagnostic Log Trace files. See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The only configuration in the File Fetcher Module is the debug level which specifies the amount of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of the File fetcher task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3269</id>
		<title>WCU platform</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WCU_platform&amp;diff=3269"/>
		<updated>2022-12-22T14:46:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* WCU Modules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Wireless Communication Unit (WCU) is the in-vehicle unit running the WICE WCU software and communicating with the vehicle and the WICE back-end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
WCU:s are identified by a unique text string, which by convention is the MAC address of (one of) the ethernet interfaces in the unit. The WCU id is configured on each WCU (automatically from the MAC address) and is a search parameter available in the WICE Portal web-GUI.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Hardware Platform ===&lt;br /&gt;
The following hardware platforms are supported for the WICE WCU:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Host Mobility MX-4 (T20, T30, T30FR and V61) &lt;br /&gt;
* Fältcom MIIPS Committo &lt;br /&gt;
* Raspberry Pi&lt;br /&gt;
* Nvidia Jetson Xavier&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on the specific hardware platform, the WCU supports a number of communication interfaces, such as CAN, LIN, FlexRay and Ethernet and that be configured in different ways using the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU platform can also support some limited user-interaction through light-emitting diodes (LED) on the side of the unit. A description of the LEDs is available  [[WCU LEDs|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Firmware ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU firmware is the operating system, device drivers and basic packages required to run the system. The WCU units are delivered with the firmware installed. It can be remotely upgraded from the WICE Portal in a similar way as the WCU Software (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Software  ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software is delivered as a self-extracting application installation package, which can be run on the WCU:s manually from a command prompt, using a suitably prepared USB stick, or updated remotely using the WICE Portal mechanism for remote software upgrades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE solution for remote update of the WCU software works as follows: The Alkit staff member responsible for the WCU software deployment publishes installation packages for supported versions of the WCU software at the WICE Portal, in the WICE back-end server infrastructure. WICE administrators can then select which version of the available WCU software versions should be run on each of the WCUs that are registered in the system (see [[The Portal Administrator View#Edit the WCU Configuration|Edit WCU Configuration]]). This is done by choosing a particular version in a drop-down menu in the WICE Portal in the WCU configuration view. Many WCUs can be configured at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
Then, whenever a WCU connects to the back-end, a check is made to see whether a different WCU software version (higher or lower version) than the currently installed version for the WCU in question is configured. If so, the installation package is downloaded to the WCU’s solid-state storage over the secure TLS connection that was established when the WCU connected. When the download is finished, the WCU software package will be installed on the WCU. After the installation has finished, the WCU will report back to the WICE back-end infrastructure with the new version of the WCU, so that WICE administrators can keep track of the currently installed software version, as well as the history of software changes.&lt;br /&gt;
A similar process is performed to update the WCU firmware and operating system. When new firmware is installed, the partition where the certificate and configuration files reside is left unaltered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU software release history is available [[https://wice-sysdoc.alkit.se/index.php/WICE_WCU_Software_Revision_History here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Extra Bundles ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some WICE software packages, referred to as &#039;extra bundles&#039; are not installed by default. The user needs to select which, if any, extra bundles should be installed on a particular WCU. This is done in the WICE Portal, Edit Configuration. [[Extra bundles|For more information about Extra bundles, click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WCU Modules ===&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU Modules are the software components of the WCU producing&lt;br /&gt;
measurement data. They are configured through the Configuration Manager, which communicates with the WICE Portal, where the user can access and change the overall WCU configuration and the per-module configurations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The data capture behavior of the WCU modules is described by a measurement task, downloaded from the WICE Portal by the Task Manager component, which sets up the modules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The available WCU modules are:  &lt;br /&gt;
* Arcos&lt;br /&gt;
* Area5&lt;br /&gt;
* Audio&lt;br /&gt;
* Blue piraT&lt;br /&gt;
* Canrecorder&lt;br /&gt;
* DoIP&lt;br /&gt;
* ETAS&lt;br /&gt;
* Ethernet capture&lt;br /&gt;
* GPS&lt;br /&gt;
* IDC&lt;br /&gt;
* LPD&lt;br /&gt;
* M-Log&lt;br /&gt;
* Rapid Prototyping&lt;br /&gt;
* Signal Reader&lt;br /&gt;
* State-of-Health&lt;br /&gt;
* SWDL&lt;br /&gt;
* Video &lt;br /&gt;
* WCU internals and status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Arcos module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Arcos module makes it possible to use an Arcos data logger (from Ipetronik) connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the Arcos and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Area5 module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Area5 module is used to read out ECU memory segments using CCP or XCP. The binary data of the memory segments are uploaded to the back-end where they are translated into parameter sets and signals.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Audio module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The audio module makes it possible to record sound clips from microphones connected to the audio devices of WCUs. Audio can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live audio monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of audio can be triggered by a push button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started or when the trigger condition is fulfilled the audio recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the audio recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Audio sample rate, number of channels (mono or stereo) and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Blue piraT Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Blue piraT module makes it possible to use a Blue piraT logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement configuration can be downloaded to the logger and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== CAN Recorder Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The CAN Recorder Module supports frame logging on the CAN-buses the WCU is connected to. Filters for the ECU identifiers to log can be&lt;br /&gt;
defined in the WICE Portal interface when creating a CAN Recorder measurement task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DLT module ====&lt;br /&gt;
See [[DLT Module|DLT module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== DoIP module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The DoIP module makes it possible to establish a tunnel over the Internet to a WCU for synchronous communication using the DoIP protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
In the WCU, the remote DoIP functionality is based on the DoIP daemon &#039;&#039;&#039;doipd&#039;&#039;&#039;, which relays DoIP communication between vehicle and the back-end. &lt;br /&gt;
It also takes care of waking up the vehicle when communication requests are pending. For more information see [[Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)|Remote Diagnostics over IP (DoIP)]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Ethernet Capture Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Ethernet Capture module supports logging of ethernet frames on one of the WCU&#039;s ethernet interfaces. Filters can be set (in tcpdump format) for selecting which frames to capture. The result is logged in a pcap file, which is uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ETAS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The ETAS module makes it possible to use an ETAS ES720 measurement system connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port.&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the ES720 and measurement data can be offloaded and uploaded to the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== File Fetcher Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The only configuration in the File Fetcher Module is the debug level which specifies the amount of logging from the WCU regarding its handling of the File fetcher task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== GPS Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The GPS Module reads the position of a WCU at regular intervals and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal, to support map-based localization of vehicles for the fleet-management service and for the &amp;quot;Plot Route&amp;quot; function of the metrology service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== IDC module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The IDC module allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent on the&lt;br /&gt;
in-vehicle network (either CAN or Ethernet), and the responses are collected in a result file. IDC can also read OBD-II PIDs and interpret the responses.&lt;br /&gt;
IDC supports diagnostics over CAN using ISO15765-2 and over IP/Ethernet using ISO13400. Both physical and functional ECU addressing is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
An IDC sequence file can in addition to diagnostic requests also contain commands, as described in [[IDC sequence file commands]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== LPD module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The LPD module supports long term driveline testing using a custom built Android app that connects to the WICE WCU. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== M-Log module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The M-log module makes it possible to use an M-Log data logger connected to the WCU through an Ethernet port. Measurement tasks can be downloaded to the M-Log and data can be offloaded and uploaded to the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Rapid Prototyping module ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the Rapid Prototyping (RP) module, custom software components can be run on the WCU for proof-of-concept testing of new in-vehicle functionality. A Signal Broker API (provided by the Signal Reader module, see below) can be used to easily access in-vehicle signals and parameters. Output data from the RP module is uploaded to the WICE back-end where it is made available in the WICE Portal. The RP module supports both native applications, compiled for the WCU processor architecture, and Node.js applications written in Javascript. The latter is particularly useful for providing in-vehicle GUI functionality.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[WICE_RP_How-To]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Signal Reader Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Signal Reader module executes a measurement task, monitors and logs time-series signal data and stores the data in an MDF file (Measurement Data&lt;br /&gt;
Format). Signals can be recorded from the vehicle&#039;s internal communication buses (e.g. CAN, LIN, FlexRay). A number of signals internal to the WCU are also available: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader also supports logging of signals using CCP, XCP and UDS diagnostics. This is sometimes referred to as Active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Triggers are supported, switching between measurement set-ups and starting and stopping recorders. Trigger expression syntax is described [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]]. Pre- and post-trig recording can be specified, which results in signal data being recorded prior to or subsequent to a trigger condition respectively. Minimum and maximum shot lengths of recorders can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== State of Health Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The State-of-Health (SoH) module is used to read out a limited data set&lt;br /&gt;
from test vehicles to monitor their operational status. The specific data to be read is configurable from the WICE portal and includes&lt;br /&gt;
position, mileage (odometer), battery voltage, ECU software numbers, Diagnostic Trouble Codes and uptime. The SoH module uses the IDC module to&lt;br /&gt;
service a sequence of diagnostic requests, created by the WICE Portal&lt;br /&gt;
based on which data is requested and the diagnostic database of the vehicle type. Position is accessed from the GPS Module (see below)&lt;br /&gt;
and uptime is accessed from the WCU internal module (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SWDL module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Software Download (SWDL) module makes it possible to download ECU software to connected vehicles for re-programming. The input to the SWDL module is a number of VBF (Versatile Binary Format) files containing the ECU software, and PIN codes for the ECUs to be reprogrammed. Sequence files can also be supplied for pre- and post-programming diagnostics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Video module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The video module makes it possible to record video clips from cameras connected to the WCU. Video can also be streamed in real time from WCUs for live video monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
The recording of video can be triggered by a push-button connected to the WCU, or from the Signal Reader module by specifying a recorder name or a trigger expression. In the latter case, when the corresponding Signal Reader recorder is started (i.e. when a trigger condition is fulfilled) the video recording starts, and when the recorder stops, the video recording does as well. Pre-trig buffering is supported.&lt;br /&gt;
Video resolution, frame rate and compression format can be specified in the module configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU internals Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU internals Module logs useful information about a WCU, including&lt;br /&gt;
uptime, battery voltage (on the WCU power input), and memory usage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== WCU Status Module ====&lt;br /&gt;
The WCU status Daemon, statusd,&lt;br /&gt;
monitors the status of the WCU, including all the modules, and&lt;br /&gt;
reports to the WICE Portal. The daemon also provides a common i/o API&lt;br /&gt;
for all modules, including GPS and digital i/o.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Power Management ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Power Management settings of the WCU determines how and when the unit is started and shut down. What Power Management mechanisms are available depends on the WCU hardware platform. The following refers to the MX4 platform.&lt;br /&gt;
The MX4 unit can be started and stopped based on the &#039;&#039;ignition&#039;&#039; input pin or on the availability or absence of CAN traffic on any of the CAN interfaces. The WCU can also be configured to start after a specific time interval from shut-down. The configuration is done in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Power Management|  WCU Configuration]] in the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
Note that the behaviour of the ignition pin depends on the setting of the START switch on the back of the WCU. If the switch is set to INT the pin will always be active, so that if the WCU is set to&#039;&#039;Wake on ignition&#039;&#039; it will be always on. If the switch is set to EXT, the pin will reflect the current state of the ignition of the vehicle (providing it is correctly installed).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.80&amp;diff=3268</id>
		<title>New features in v2.80</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.80&amp;diff=3268"/>
		<updated>2022-12-22T14:44:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Play multiple time-overlapping videos simultaneously in Preview data ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Preview data]] has been improved so it displays multiple time-overlapping videos in the media controller appearing below the main plot if there are any video or audio measurements for the current selected measurement file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All time-overlapping videos can be viewed simultaneously or individually. If two or more videos exists for the same point in time, one of the videos can be viewed in picture-in-picture mode and thus moved to any available screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit test request name has now &amp;quot;test type&amp;quot; (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
The window Edit Vehicle-dialog which is reached by going to the Vehicles tab, choosing a vehicle and pressing the &amp;quot;Edit Vehicle&amp;quot;-button and then &amp;quot;Edit test request name&amp;quot;. It opens a window containing information about test-labels and associated names. These associated names, also known as &amp;quot;Test request names&amp;quot;, can be edited or added for each test label value (TCPxRef value). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New feature in this window: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Column &amp;quot;Test type&amp;quot; is added. &lt;br /&gt;
* Can now save [[Save View and Search Expressions|views]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Windows sizes are more dynamic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit signal reader assignment change which measurement setup that will startup ==&lt;br /&gt;
When edit/creating a signal reader assignment it was previously the first created measurement setup that will run at the start. Now it is possible to select another by selecting a setup and then click on  &amp;quot;Set as startup&amp;quot;. Read more about signal reader assignment [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for signal names with square brackets in trigger expressions ==&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger expressions can now handle signal names with square brackets (i.e. [ and ]). Specifically, active signal names (from SDDB files) are now allowed to contain square brackets. (Previously they were replaced by underscore.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Area5 result file decoding handles non-ascii characters (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there are non-ascii characters in an a2l file used for area5 decoding, the characters are escaped to produce valid json output.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3181</id>
		<title>WICE Internal Signals</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=WICE_Internal_Signals&amp;diff=3181"/>
		<updated>2022-09-19T20:10:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The following WICE-internal signals are supported by Signal Reader:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!&#039;&#039;&#039;Signal name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
!Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_X&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the X direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Y&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Y direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Accelerometer_Z&lt;br /&gt;
|The value of the Z direction of the WCU&#039;s built-in accelerometer. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 1 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Audio_Device_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of audio device 2 (1=recording, 0 = not recording). When present in a recorder, the audio module will record sound from the device.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Busload_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|The bus load on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|CSQ&lt;br /&gt;
|The built-in modem&#039;s CSQ value (Signal Quality)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Year&lt;br /&gt;
|The year of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Month&lt;br /&gt;
|The month (1-12) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Day&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the month (1-31) of the current date. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Weekday&lt;br /&gt;
|The day of the week (1-7, where 1 is Sunday). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Hour&lt;br /&gt;
|The hour of the day (0-23). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Minute&lt;br /&gt;
|The minute of the hour (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Date_Second&lt;br /&gt;
|The second of the minute (0-59). &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Dynamic_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Special signals with values assignable from external software components (typically used for Rapid Prototyping).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__AI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Analog input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DI_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital input number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|IO__DO_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Digital output number &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_CAN_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on CAN bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Log_All_Frames_FlexRay_&amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Log all CAN frames on Flexray bus &amp;lt;n&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS latitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS longitude&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Receive_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of receiving data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication) interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth0 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_eth1&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the eth1 interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Network_Transmit_Rate_ppp0&lt;br /&gt;
|The rate i kilobilts per second of transmitting data on the ppp0 (i.e. mobile data communication)  interface &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Power_Mode&lt;br /&gt;
|The power mode of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated once, at program start&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Random_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|A random number generator updated at each measurement set-up switch&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal&lt;br /&gt;
|The start signal of the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Signal_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The voltage of the start signal of the WCU, in millivolts &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Speed&lt;br /&gt;
|The GPS speed&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Start_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The start switch of the WCU&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Tester_Present&lt;br /&gt;
|When present in a measurement set-up, a Tester Present diagnostic request (with suppress Positive Response bit set) will be sent periodically.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Epoch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the epoch (Jan 1, 1970, 00:00) &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Start&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the start of the task &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Time_Since_Setup_Switch&lt;br /&gt;
|The time elapsed since the activation of the current measurement set-up &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Trigger_Button&lt;br /&gt;
|The trigger button connected to the WCU &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_CPU&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU CPU usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Usage_Memory&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU memory usage in percent  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_1&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 1 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Video_Camera_2&lt;br /&gt;
|The status of video camera 2 (1=connected, 0 = disconnected). When present in a recorder, the video module will record video from the camera.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Battery&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU battery voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Temp&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU internal temperature in degrees Celsius&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|WCU_Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
|The WCU voltage in millivolts&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3180</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Trigger Expressions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3180"/>
		<updated>2022-09-15T11:39:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Trigger conditions are expressions evaluated by the Signal Reader module to control when recorders are started and stopped and when measurement set-up switches are performed.&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger conditions are boolean expressions, evaluated to either true or false. A number of operators can be combined to form the trigger expression. The allowed operators in trigger expressions are shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for equality. Syntax: expression = expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for inequality. Syntax: expression != expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!AND&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical conjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression AND boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!OR&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical disjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression OR boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_FROM_TO&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes from the specified value to the other specified value. Syntax: CHANGE_FROM_TO(Signal, value, value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the specified signal is greater than zero. Syntax: TIMER(signal, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EXPR_TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the condition is fulfilled. Syntax: EXPR_TIMER(expression, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIME_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the time elapsed while the supplied boolean expression has been true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: TIME_COUNTER(expression) or TIME_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!SAMPLE_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the number of samples received while the boolean expression is true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression) or SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EVERY&lt;br /&gt;
|Repeatedly becomes true after a time interval, specified in seconds, has elapsed. Syntax: EVERY(time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MOVAV&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates a moving average over the specified signal. Syntax: MOVAV(Signal)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!ABS&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the absolute value of the specified expression. Syntax: ABS(expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MIN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the minimum value of two expressions. Syntax: MIN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MAX&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the maximum value of two expressions. Syntax: MAX(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MEAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the mean value of two expressions. Syntax: MEAN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!LOSS_OF_SIGNAL&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal disappears for the specified number of seconds. Syntax: LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(Signal, seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3179</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Trigger Expressions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3179"/>
		<updated>2022-09-15T11:32:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Trigger conditions are expressions evaluated by the Signal Reader module to control when recorders are started and stopped and when measurement set-up switches are performed.&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger conditions are boolean expressions, evaluated to either true or false. A number of operators can be combined to form the trigger expression. The allowed operators in trigger expressions are shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for equality. Syntax: expression = expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for inequality. Syntax: expression != expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!AND&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical conjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression AND boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!OR&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical disjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression OR boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value with at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_FROM_TO&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes from the specified value to the other specified value. Syntax: CHANGE_FROM_TO(Signal, value, value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN_BY&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal decreases its value by exactly the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN_BY(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_FROM_TO&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes from the specified value to the other specified value. Syntax: CHANGE_FROM_TO(Signal, value, value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the specified signal is greater than zero. Syntax: TIMER(signal, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EXPR_TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the condition is fulfilled. Syntax: EXPR_TIMER(expression, time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIME_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the time elapsed while the supplied boolean expression has been true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: TIME_COUNTER(expression) or TIME_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!SAMPLE_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the number of samples received while the boolean expression is true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression) or SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EVERY&lt;br /&gt;
|Repeatedly becomes true after a time interval, specified in seconds, has elapsed. Syntax: EVERY(time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MOVAV&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates a moving average over the specified signal. Syntax: MOVAV(Signal)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!ABS&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the absolute value of the specified expression. Syntax: ABS(expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MIN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the minimum value of two expressions. Syntax: MIN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MAX&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the maximum value of two expressions. Syntax: MAX(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MEAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the mean value of two expressions. Syntax: MEAN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!LOSS_OF_SIGNAL&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal disappears for the specified number of seconds. Syntax: LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(Signal, seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3036</id>
		<title>New features in v2.75</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3036"/>
		<updated>2022-04-19T06:19:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== New way of handling diagnostic references for vehicle profiles ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-diag-ref-edit-mode.png|thumb|The dialog for editing diagnostic references - a new way to choose ECUs for a vehicle profile.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Before, one and only one diagnostic reference file (sddb-file) could be connected to a vehicle profile. This release introduces a new and more complex way of choosing which ECUs and software versions that are associated to a vehicle profile. It is possible to select single files like before, combine multiple files or manually add/remove single ECUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality is reached through [[Vehicle Profiles|the Vehicle Profiles tab]] and how to manage it is described in the section [[Vehicle Profiles#Edit diagnostic reference - Manage active signals connected to the vehicle profile|Edit diagnostic reference]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New trigger expression for Loss of Signal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader supports a new trigger expression intended for situations where a signals disappears after being present on a communication bus. The syntax is LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(SignalName, Seconds), which will become true when the named signal is gone for at least the specified number of seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader support for J1939 DM1 messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader now supports reading and logging of J1939 DM1 messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for alternative means of automatic connection of a vehicle to a WCU ==&lt;br /&gt;
Historically, WCUs have had the functionality of automatically telling the portal which vehicle it is in. This has been done by reading the vehicle&#039;s VIN number and reporting this to portal which then has made a connection between the two entities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The periodicity of Active Signals can be set in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
The periodicity active signals can be set in the &#039;Modules&#039; tab in the Signal Reader assignment editor. Click the &#039;Modules Settings&#039; button to browse the Active Signals by ECU and view/edit the periodicity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for M-Log firmware updates ==&lt;br /&gt;
The firmware of an M-Log unit can be updated by selecting the desired firmware version in the M-Log module settings.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3035</id>
		<title>New features in v2.75</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3035"/>
		<updated>2022-04-19T06:17:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== New way of handling diagnostic references for vehicle profiles ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-diag-ref-edit-mode.png|thumb|The dialog for editing diagnostic references - a new way to choose ECUs for a vehicle profile.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Before, one and only one diagnostic reference file (sddb-file) could be connected to a vehicle profile. This release introduces a new and more complex way of choosing which ECUs and software versions that are associated to a vehicle profile. It is possible to select single files like before, combine multiple files or manually add/remove single ECUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality is reached through [[Vehicle Profiles|the Vehicle Profiles tab]] and how to manage it is described in the section [[Vehicle Profiles#Edit diagnostic reference - Manage active signals connected to the vehicle profile|Edit diagnostic reference]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New trigger expression for Loss of Signal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader supports a new trigger expression intended for situations where a signals disappears after being present on a communication bus. The syntax is LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(SignalName, Seconds), which will become true when the named signal is gone for at least the specified number of seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader support for J1939 DM1 messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader now supports reading and logging of J1939 DM1 messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for alternative means of automatic connection of a vehicle to a WCU ==&lt;br /&gt;
Historically, WCUs have had the functionality of automatically telling the portal which vehicle it is in. This has been done by reading the vehicle&#039;s VIN number and reporting this to portal which then has made a connection between the two entities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The periodicity of Active Signals can be set in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
The periodicity active signals can be set in the &#039;Modules&#039; tab in the Signal Reader assignment editor. Click the &#039;Modules Settings&#039; button to browse the Active Signals by ECU and view/edit the periodicity.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3031</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Trigger Expressions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Trigger_Expressions&amp;diff=3031"/>
		<updated>2022-04-14T06:48:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Trigger conditions are expressions evaluated by the Signal Reader module to control when recorders are started and stopped and when measurement set-up switches are performed.&lt;br /&gt;
Trigger conditions are boolean expressions, evaluated to either true or false. A number of operators can be combined to form the trigger expression. The allowed operators in trigger expressions are shown in the table below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for equality. Syntax: expression = expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!!=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for inequality. Syntax: expression != expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater than right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt; expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;lt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being less or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;lt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!&amp;gt;=&lt;br /&gt;
|Tests for left side of expression being greater or equal to right side. Syntax: expression &amp;gt;= expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!AND&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical conjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression AND boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!OR&lt;br /&gt;
|Logical disjunction between left and right side boolean expressions. Syntax: boolean expression OR boolean expression&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes value by at least the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_UP&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value with the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_UP(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_DOWN&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal increases its value with the specified amount. Syntax: CHANGE_DOWN(Signal, amount)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!CHANGE_FROM_TO&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal changes from the specified value to the other specified value. Syntax: CHANGE_FROM_TO(Signal, value, value)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the specified signal is greater than zero. Syntax: TIMER(signal,time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EXPR_TIMER&lt;br /&gt;
|Effects a delay in seconds from that the condition is fulfilled. Syntax: EXPR_TIMER(expression,time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!TIME_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the time elapsed while the supplied boolean expression has been true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: TIME_COUNTER(expression) or TIME_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!SAMPLE_COUNTER&lt;br /&gt;
|Counts the number of samples received while the boolean expression is true. You can optionally supply an expression resetting the time counter to zero. Syntax: SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression) or SAMPLE_COUNTER(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!EVERY&lt;br /&gt;
|Repeatedly becomes true after a time interval, specified in seconds, has elapsed. Syntax: EVERY(time)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MOVAV&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates a moving average over the specified signal. Syntax: MOVAV(Signal)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!ABS&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the absolute value of the specified expression. Syntax: ABS(expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MIN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the minimum value of two expressions. Syntax: MIN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MAX&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the maximum value of two expressions. Syntax: MAX(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!MEAN&lt;br /&gt;
|Calculates the mean value of two expressions. Syntax: MEAN(expression, expression)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!LOSS_OF_SIGNAL&lt;br /&gt;
|True when the specified signal disappears for the specified number of seconds. Syntax: LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(Signal, seconds)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3029</id>
		<title>New features in v2.75</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.75&amp;diff=3029"/>
		<updated>2022-04-13T12:27:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== New way of handling diagnostic references for vehicle profiles ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-diag-ref-edit-mode.png|thumb|The dialog for editing diagnostic references - a new way to choose ECUs for a vehicle profile.]]&lt;br /&gt;
Before, one and only one diagnostic reference file (sddb-file) could be connected to a vehicle profile. This release introduces a new way of choosing which ECUs and software versions that are associated to a vehicle profile. It is also possible to combine multiple files for a vehicle profile or manually add/remove single ECUs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This functionality is reached through [[Vehicle Profiles|the Vehicle Profiles tab]] and how to manage it is described in the section [[Vehicle Profiles#Edit diagnostic reference - Manage active signals connected to the vehicle profile|Edit diagnostic reference]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New trigger expression for Loss of Signal ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader supports a new trigger expression intended for situations where a signals disappears after being present on a communication bus. The syntax is LOSS_OF_SIGNAL(SignalName, Seconds), which will become true when the named signal is gone for at least the specified number of seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader support for J1939 DM1 messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader now supports reading and logging of J1939 DM1 messages.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2999</id>
		<title>New features in v2.74</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2999"/>
		<updated>2022-03-18T07:15:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* MSW validation for MLog tasks */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Users table: Two new columns showing users&#039; access to M2M and the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|Users tab]] (found under the Administration tab) there are two new columns for each user row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* M2M access&lt;br /&gt;
* Portal access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denoting whether or not the user has access to the M2M API (Application Programmatic Interface) or to the Portal (the web-based graphical user interface).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If logged in as an administrator these accesses can be edited for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removed dialogs regarding file downloads ==&lt;br /&gt;
After this release there are no dialogs asking about file naming when downloading result files for a task. Hence less actions required before the files can be downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in Signal Reader assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose to get snapshot and extended data in Assignment editor for DTCs  read out in a DREC. If the sequence file contains a DTC read-out request (19 02) it will be possible to activate this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unlimited number of shots selectable for recorders in Signal Reader assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
Th number of shots can now be set to infinite (unlimited).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New DAQ information window ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new window in the assignment editor is added. It can be reached from the modules tab or the measurement setup view by clicking on the button “DAQ Information”. The new window shows each module in every measurement setup that has signals in a recorder and comes from an A2L file. For each module, this window will show signals in it and which DAQ-list it belongs to. If the information about the DAQ list can be parsed from the a2l file, with the selected interface, it will also show how many bytes each list can contain.&lt;br /&gt;
== MSW validation for MLog tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to enter MSW numbers for Mlog Tasks, to ensure the measurement setup of the Mlog is using the correct description files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader improvements ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple improvements to the Signal Reader module:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Now properly supports pre-trigged recording of WICE internal signals, &lt;br /&gt;
* Supports for an unlimited number of shots in recorders, &lt;br /&gt;
* Supports diagnostic recorders (DRECs) using DoIP, &lt;br /&gt;
* Handles DTC extended data and shaphots per DREC,&lt;br /&gt;
* Enables and disables Ethernet using digital out 4 at MS switches when using DoIP, &lt;br /&gt;
* Has a more lenient MSW validation mechanism: if ECU SW numbers read-out using SoH do not match the assignment, validation fails.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bugfixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2998</id>
		<title>New features in v2.74</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2998"/>
		<updated>2022-03-18T07:13:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Users table: Two new columns showing users&#039; access to M2M and the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|Users tab]] (found under the Administration tab) there are two new columns for each user row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* M2M access&lt;br /&gt;
* Portal access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denoting whether or not the user has access to the M2M API (Application Programmatic Interface) or to the Portal (the web-based graphical user interface).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If logged in as an administrator these accesses can be edited for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removed dialogs regarding file downloads ==&lt;br /&gt;
After this release there are no dialogs asking about file naming when downloading result files for a task. Hence less actions required before the files can be downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in Signal Reader assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose to get snapshot and extended data in Assignment editor for DTCs  read out in a DREC. If the sequence file contains a DTC read-out request (19 02) it will be possible to activate this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Unlimited number of shots selectable for recorders in Signal Reader assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
Th number of shots can now be set to infinite (unlimited).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New DAQ information window ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new window in the assignment editor is added. It can be reached from the modules tab or the measurement setup view by clicking on the button “DAQ Information”. The new window shows each module in every measurement setup that has signals in a recorder and comes from an A2L file. For each module, this window will show signals in it and which DAQ-list it belongs to. If the information about the DAQ list can be parsed from the a2l file, with the selected interface, it will also show how many bytes each list can contain.&lt;br /&gt;
== MSW validation for MLog tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to enter MSW numbers for Mlog Tasks, to ensure the measurement setup of the Mlog is done using the correct description files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader improvements ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple improvements to the Signal Reader module:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Now properly supports pre-trigged recording of WICE internal signals, &lt;br /&gt;
* Supports for an unlimited number of shots in recorders, &lt;br /&gt;
* Supports diagnostic recorders (DRECs) using DoIP, &lt;br /&gt;
* Handles DTC extended data and shaphots per DREC,&lt;br /&gt;
* Enables and disables Ethernet using digital out 4 at MS switches when using DoIP, &lt;br /&gt;
* Has a more lenient MSW validation mechanism: if ECU SW numbers read-out using SoH do not match the assignment, validation fails.&lt;br /&gt;
* Bugfixes.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2997</id>
		<title>New features in v2.74</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2997"/>
		<updated>2022-03-18T07:06:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Users table: Two new columns showing users&amp;#039; access to M2M and the Portal */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Users table: Two new columns showing users&#039; access to M2M and the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|Users tab]] (found under the Administration tab) there are two new columns for each user row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* M2M access&lt;br /&gt;
* Portal access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denoting whether or not the user has access to the M2M API (Application Programmatic Interface) or to the Portal (the web-based graphical user interface).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If logged in as an administrator these accesses can be edited for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removed dialogs regarding file downloads ==&lt;br /&gt;
After this release there are no dialogs asking about file naming when downloading result files for a task. Hence less actions required before the files can be downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose to get snapshot and extended data in Assignment editor for DTCs  read out in a DREC. If the sequence file contains a DTC read-out request (19 02) it will be possible to activate this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New DAQ information window ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new window in the assignment editor is added. It can be reached from the modules tab or the measurement setup view by clicking on the button “DAQ Information”. The new window shows each module in every measurement setup that has signals in a recorder and comes from an A2L file. For each module, this window will show signals in it and which DAQ-list it belongs to. If the information about the DAQ list can be parsed from the a2l file, with the selected interface, it will also show how many bytes each list can contain.&lt;br /&gt;
== MSW validation for MLog tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to enter MSW numbers for Mlog Tasks, to ensure the measurement setup of the Mlog is done using the correct description files.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2996</id>
		<title>New features in v2.74</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2996"/>
		<updated>2022-03-18T07:03:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Users table: Two new columns showing users&#039; access to M2M and the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|Users tab]] (found under the Administration tab) there are two new columns for each user row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* M2M access&lt;br /&gt;
* Portal access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denoting whether or not the user has access to the M2M-api (programmatic interface) or to the Portal (the graphical website).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If logged in as an administrator these accesses can be edited for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removed dialogs regarding file downloads ==&lt;br /&gt;
After this release there are no dialogs asking about file naming when downloading result files for a task. Hence less actions required before the files can be downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose to get snapshot and extended data in Assignment editor for DTCs  read out in a DREC. If the sequence file contains a DTC read-out request (19 02) it will be possible to activate this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New DAQ information window ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new window in the assignment editor is added. It can be reached from the modules tab or the measurement setup view by clicking on the button “DAQ Information”. The new window shows each module in every measurement setup that has signals in a recorder and comes from an A2L file. For each module, this window will show signals in it and which DAQ-list it belongs to. If the information about the DAQ list can be parsed from the a2l file, with the selected interface, it will also show how many bytes each list can contain.&lt;br /&gt;
== MSW validation for MLog tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to enter MSW numbers for Mlog Tasks, to ensure the measurement setup of the Mlog is done using the correct description files.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2995</id>
		<title>New features in v2.74</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.74&amp;diff=2995"/>
		<updated>2022-03-18T06:58:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in assignment editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Users table: Two new columns showing users&#039; access to M2M and the Portal ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The User Tab|Users tab]] (found under the Administration tab) there are two new columns for each user row:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* M2M access&lt;br /&gt;
* Portal access&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Denoting whether or not the user has access to the M2M-api (programmatic interface) or to the Portal (the graphical website).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If logged in as an administrator these accesses can be edited for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Removed dialogs regarding file downloads ==&lt;br /&gt;
After this release there are no dialogs asking about file naming when downloading result files for a task. Hence less actions required before the files can be downloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Read snapshot &amp;amp; Extended Data for DREC in assignment editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose to get snapshot and extended data in Assignment editor for DTCs  read out in a DREC. If the sequence file contains a DTC read-out request (19 02) it will be possible to activate this function.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New DAQ information window ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new window in the assignment editor is added. It can be reached from the modules tab or the measurement setup view by clicking on the button “DAQ Information”. The new window shows each module in every measurement setup that has signals in a recorder and comes from an A2L file. For each module, this window will show signals in it and which DAQ-list it belongs to. If the information about the DAQ list can be parsed from the a2l file, with the selected interface, it will also show how many bytes each list can contain.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2978</id>
		<title>New features in v2.72</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2978"/>
		<updated>2022-02-07T07:39:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* File fetcher: A new task to fetch files from other units in vehicle (Not in all versions of the Portal) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== DLT task supports several daemons ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-dlt-2-72.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)]] task can now fetch logs from several daemons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously the task could only have one daemon. Then the address and port number of the daemon were specified in the [[DLT Module]], while the filters to be applied to the logs were specified while creating the task itself. This is still the case for WCUs that have a software version earlier than 2.72.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this release the addresses and port numbers for each daemon as well as the filters are specified while creating the task, given that the software version of the WCUs are 2.72.0. The only thing that hereby is specified in the DLT Module is the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher: A new module to fetch files from other units in vehicle (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-file-fetcher-2x72.png|thumb|New task dialog of the File fetcher task.|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Creating a Task#File fetcher|The File fetcher task]] will make the WCU fetch files from another unit in the vehicle and make them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - The path to a file or file-containing directory on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[WCU platform#File Fetcher Module|The File fetcher module]] only contains debug level to steer the log output of the WCU when it is handling the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VIN reader supports method &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose DoIP as a VIN reader method in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|VIN reader module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU History: new searchable columns &amp;quot;WCU Version&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;WCU Firmware Version&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
In [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], when right-clicking a WCU and choosing &amp;quot;Show WCU history&amp;quot;, a dialog window with the changes made to the WCU shows up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This release adds two new &#039;&#039;searchable&#039;&#039; columns to this dialog window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Version&#039;&#039;&#039; - Shows when a new version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039; - shows when a new firmware version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns are searched using [[Tasks Tab#Search columns with regular expressions|regular expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS (2C/2A) and XCP over CAN for A2L-based signals in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.72, Signal Reader supports UDS (service 2C/2A) and XCP/CAN communication for A2L-based signals. In the Signal Reader Assignment Editor the selection of whether to use UDS or XCP/CAN (or the previously available CCP/CAN, XCP/UDP or XCP/TCP) for A2L Signals is done in the Modules tab. For more information about this, see [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Module settings for Signal Reader now has support for selecting DoIP as default diagnostic channel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the module settings for Signal Reader you can now select DoIP as default channel. This affects diagnostics based signals and DRECs. When DoIP is selected as the default interface it is also possible to select static IP or the IP that the vehicle announces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader Assignment Editor shows IP address and port from A2L-file ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the assignment editor for Signal Reader, for communication interfaces over Ethernet (XCP/UDP and XCP/TCP), the IP address and port that is specified in the A2L file is displayed. It is also possible to change the address and port for the specific assignment in the same window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit test request name (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button has been added to the Edit Vehicle-dialog which is reached by going to [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], choosing a vehicle and pressing the &amp;quot;Edit Vehicle&amp;quot;-button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-vechicle-with-edit-test-request-name-btn-ver-2x72.png|thumb|The new button showing in the &amp;quot;Edit vechicle&amp;quot;-dialog. Not all versions of the Portal contain this button.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The new button is called &amp;quot;Edit test request name&amp;quot;. It opens a window containing information about test-labels and associated names. These associated names, also known as &amp;quot;Test request names&amp;quot;, can be edited or added for each test label value (TCPxRef value).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2977</id>
		<title>New features in v2.72</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2977"/>
		<updated>2022-02-07T07:34:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Signal Reader A2L. Interface that is over Ethernet shows the IP-Address that is from the A2L-file */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== DLT task supports several daemons ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-dlt-2-72.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)]] task can now fetch logs from several daemons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously the task could only have one daemon. Then the address and port number of the daemon were specified in the [[DLT Module]], while the filters to be applied to the logs were specified while creating the task itself. This is still the case for WCUs that have a software version earlier than 2.72.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this release the addresses and port numbers for each daemon as well as the filters are specified while creating the task, given that the software version of the WCUs are 2.72.0. The only thing that hereby is specified in the DLT Module is the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher: A new task to fetch files from other units in vehicle (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-file-fetcher-2x72.png|thumb|New task dialog of the File fetcher task.|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Creating a Task#File fetcher|The File fetcher task]] will make the WCU fetch files from another unit in the vehicle and make them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - The path to a file or file-containing directory on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[WCU platform#File Fetcher Module|The File fetcher module]] only contains debug level to steer the log output of the WCU when it is handling the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VIN reader supports method &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose DoIP as a VIN reader method in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|VIN reader module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU History: new searchable columns &amp;quot;WCU Version&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;WCU Firmware Version&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
In [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], when right-clicking a WCU and choosing &amp;quot;Show WCU history&amp;quot;, a dialog window with the changes made to the WCU shows up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This release adds two new &#039;&#039;searchable&#039;&#039; columns to this dialog window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Version&#039;&#039;&#039; - Shows when a new version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039; - shows when a new firmware version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns are searched using [[Tasks Tab#Search columns with regular expressions|regular expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS (2C/2A) and XCP over CAN for A2L-based signals in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.72, Signal Reader supports UDS (service 2C/2A) and XCP/CAN communication for A2L-based signals. In the Signal Reader Assignment Editor the selection of whether to use UDS or XCP/CAN (or the previously available CCP/CAN, XCP/UDP or XCP/TCP) for A2L Signals is done in the Modules tab. For more information about this, see [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Module settings for Signal Reader now has support for selecting DoIP as default diagnostic channel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the module settings for Signal Reader you can now select DoIP as default channel. This affects diagnostics based signals and DRECs. When DoIP is selected as the default interface it is also possible to select static IP or the IP that the vehicle announces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader Assignment Editor shows IP address and port from A2L-file ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the assignment editor for Signal Reader, for communication interfaces over Ethernet (XCP/UDP and XCP/TCP), the IP address and port that is specified in the A2L file is displayed. It is also possible to change the address and port for the specific assignment in the same window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit test request name (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button has been added to the Edit Vehicle-dialog which is reached by going to [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], choosing a vehicle and pressing the &amp;quot;Edit Vehicle&amp;quot;-button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-vechicle-with-edit-test-request-name-btn-ver-2x72.png|thumb|The new button showing in the &amp;quot;Edit vechicle&amp;quot;-dialog. Not all versions of the Portal contain this button.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The new button is called &amp;quot;Edit test request name&amp;quot;. It opens a window containing information about test-labels and associated names. These associated names, also known as &amp;quot;Test request names&amp;quot;, can be edited or added for each test label value (TCPxRef value).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2976</id>
		<title>New features in v2.72</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2976"/>
		<updated>2022-02-07T07:30:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Module settings for signal reader has now support for selecting DoIP as default channel interface (Affecting active signals) */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== DLT task supports several daemons ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-dlt-2-72.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)]] task can now fetch logs from several daemons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously the task could only have one daemon. Then the address and port number of the daemon were specified in the [[DLT Module]], while the filters to be applied to the logs were specified while creating the task itself. This is still the case for WCUs that have a software version earlier than 2.72.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this release the addresses and port numbers for each daemon as well as the filters are specified while creating the task, given that the software version of the WCUs are 2.72.0. The only thing that hereby is specified in the DLT Module is the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher: A new task to fetch files from other units in vehicle (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-file-fetcher-2x72.png|thumb|New task dialog of the File fetcher task.|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Creating a Task#File fetcher|The File fetcher task]] will make the WCU fetch files from another unit in the vehicle and make them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - The path to a file or file-containing directory on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[WCU platform#File Fetcher Module|The File fetcher module]] only contains debug level to steer the log output of the WCU when it is handling the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VIN reader supports method &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose DoIP as a VIN reader method in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|VIN reader module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU History: new searchable columns &amp;quot;WCU Version&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;WCU Firmware Version&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
In [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], when right-clicking a WCU and choosing &amp;quot;Show WCU history&amp;quot;, a dialog window with the changes made to the WCU shows up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This release adds two new &#039;&#039;searchable&#039;&#039; columns to this dialog window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Version&#039;&#039;&#039; - Shows when a new version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039; - shows when a new firmware version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns are searched using [[Tasks Tab#Search columns with regular expressions|regular expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS (2C/2A) and XCP over CAN for A2L-based signals in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.72, Signal Reader supports UDS (service 2C/2A) and XCP/CAN communication for A2L-based signals. In the Signal Reader Assignment Editor the selection of whether to use UDS or XCP/CAN (or the previously available CCP/CAN, XCP/UDP or XCP/TCP) for A2L Signals is done in the Modules tab. For more information about this, see [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Module settings for Signal Reader now has support for selecting DoIP as default diagnostic channel ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the module settings for Signal Reader you can now select DoIP as default channel. This affects diagnostics based signals and DRECs. When DoIP is selected as the default interface it is also possible to select static IP or the IP that the vehicle announces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader A2L. Interface that is over Ethernet shows the IP-Address that is from the A2L-file ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the assignment editor for signal reader when an interface that is over Ethernet is selected for the A2L modules, the IP and port address that comes from the file is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to change the address for the specific assignment in the same window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit test request name (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button has been added to the Edit Vehicle-dialog which is reached by going to [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], choosing a vehicle and pressing the &amp;quot;Edit Vehicle&amp;quot;-button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-vechicle-with-edit-test-request-name-btn-ver-2x72.png|thumb|The new button showing in the &amp;quot;Edit vechicle&amp;quot;-dialog. Not all versions of the Portal contain this button.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The new button is called &amp;quot;Edit test request name&amp;quot;. It opens a window containing information about test-labels and associated names. These associated names, also known as &amp;quot;Test request names&amp;quot;, can be edited or added for each test label value (TCPxRef value).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2975</id>
		<title>New features in v2.72</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.72&amp;diff=2975"/>
		<updated>2022-02-07T07:25:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Support for USD &amp;amp; XCP Can for A2L Signals in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== DLT task supports several daemons ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-dlt-2-72.png|thumb|The DLT new task dialog|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Creating a Task#Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)|Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT)]] task can now fetch logs from several daemons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Previously the task could only have one daemon. Then the address and port number of the daemon were specified in the [[DLT Module]], while the filters to be applied to the logs were specified while creating the task itself. This is still the case for WCUs that have a software version earlier than 2.72.0.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this release the addresses and port numbers for each daemon as well as the filters are specified while creating the task, given that the software version of the WCUs are 2.72.0. The only thing that hereby is specified in the DLT Module is the debug level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== File fetcher: A new task to fetch files from other units in vehicle (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New-task-file-fetcher-2x72.png|thumb|New task dialog of the File fetcher task.|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Creating a Task#File fetcher|The File fetcher task]] will make the WCU fetch files from another unit in the vehicle and make them available for downloading in the Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following needs to be specified when creating such a task:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;File path&#039;&#039;&#039; - The path to a file or file-containing directory on the unit&#039;s file system. This specifies which files that will be fetched.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Username&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Password&#039;&#039;&#039; - To log in to unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;IP address&#039;&#039;&#039; - To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Port&#039;&#039;&#039; -  To find the unit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[WCU platform#File Fetcher Module|The File fetcher module]] only contains debug level to steer the log output of the WCU when it is handling the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== VIN reader supports method &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
It is now possible to choose DoIP as a VIN reader method in the [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Vinreader Module|VIN reader module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== WCU History: new searchable columns &amp;quot;WCU Version&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;WCU Firmware Version&amp;quot; ==&lt;br /&gt;
In [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], when right-clicking a WCU and choosing &amp;quot;Show WCU history&amp;quot;, a dialog window with the changes made to the WCU shows up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This release adds two new &#039;&#039;searchable&#039;&#039; columns to this dialog window:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Version&#039;&#039;&#039; - Shows when a new version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;WCU Firmware version&#039;&#039;&#039; - shows when a new firmware version has been applied to the WCU.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The columns are searched using [[Tasks Tab#Search columns with regular expressions|regular expressions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support for UDS (2C/2A) and XCP over CAN for A2L-based signals in the Signal Reader Assignment Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.72, Signal Reader supports UDS (service 2C/2A) and XCP/CAN communication for A2L-based signals. In the Signal Reader Assignment Editor the selection of whether to use UDS or XCP/CAN (or the previously available CCP/CAN, XCP/UDP or XCP/TCP) for A2L Signals is done in the Modules tab. For more information about this, see [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Module settings for signal reader has now support for selecting DoIP as default channel interface (Affecting active signals) ==&lt;br /&gt;
Module settings for signal reader can select DoIP as default channel. This affects the signals that are active and has the setting “Default channel” to the interface.  For DoIP it is also possible to select static IP or the IP that the vehicle announces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting also affects the DREC for signal readers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader A2L. Interface that is over Ethernet shows the IP-Address that is from the A2L-file ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the assignment editor for signal reader when an interface that is over Ethernet is selected for the A2L modules, the IP and port address that comes from the file is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to change the address for the specific assignment in the same window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Edit test request name (Not in all versions of the Portal) ==&lt;br /&gt;
A new button has been added to the Edit Vehicle-dialog which is reached by going to [[Vehicles|the Vehicles tab]], choosing a vehicle and pressing the &amp;quot;Edit Vehicle&amp;quot;-button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit-vechicle-with-edit-test-request-name-btn-ver-2x72.png|thumb|The new button showing in the &amp;quot;Edit vechicle&amp;quot;-dialog. Not all versions of the Portal contain this button.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The new button is called &amp;quot;Edit test request name&amp;quot;. It opens a window containing information about test-labels and associated names. These associated names, also known as &amp;quot;Test request names&amp;quot;, can be edited or added for each test label value (TCPxRef value).&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2974</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2974"/>
		<updated>2022-02-07T07:22:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Select different communication interface or transport protocol */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax |Sequence File Syntax]]. The result from a DREC will be a diagnostic log file, a text file containing both the requests from the sequence file and the corresponding responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the vehicle&#039;s communication buses. The result of an SREC is an MDF file containing the time series data of the selected signals.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
An Active Signal is a signal that is created på polling an ECU for a numerical value at a predefined frequency. The polling is typically done using the ReadDataByIdentifier diagnostic service. To create an assignment with active signals, the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated, an assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that available signals will show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals selected, a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark, a specific software version has to be selected for one or more ECUs. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select the interface between &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default Channel&amp;quot; means that the default channel in the signal reader module settings on the wcu is going to be used. Interface &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A2L modules support the following interfaces, CPP-CAN, XCP-CAN, XCP-TCP, XCP-UDP and UDS (2C/2A).[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2917</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2917"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:40:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Active signals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax |Sequence File Syntax]]. The result from a DREC will be a diagnostic log file, a text file containing both the requests from the sequence file and the corresponding responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the vehicle&#039;s communication buses. The result of an SREC is an MDF file containing the time series data of the selected signals.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
An Active Signal is a signal that is created på polling an ECU for a numerical value at a predefined frequency. The polling is typically done using the ReadDataByIdentifier diagnostic service. To create an assignment with active signals, the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated, an assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that available signals will show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals selected, a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark, a specific software version has to be selected for one or more ECUs. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2916</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2916"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:33:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - SREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax |Sequence File Syntax]]. The result from a DREC will be a diagnostic log file, a text file containing both the requests from the sequence file and the corresponding responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the vehicle&#039;s communication buses. The result of an SREC is an MDF file containing the time series data of the selected signals.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2915</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2915"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:31:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax |Sequence File Syntax]]. The result from a DREC will be a diagnostic log file, a text file containing both the requests from the sequence file and the corresponding responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2914</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2914"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:30:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax |Sequence File Syntax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2913</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2913"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:29:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[Sequence File Syntax|IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2912</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2912"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:29:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [Sequence File Syntax[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2911</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2911"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:28:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well. The syntax is the same as the one used for the IDC module, see [[IDC_Sequence_File_Syntax]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2910</id>
		<title>Signal Reader Assignment Editor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Signal_Reader_Assignment_Editor&amp;diff=2910"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:26:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Recorder - DREC */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Signal Reader Assignment Editor, also known as &#039;&#039;&#039;haf creator&#039;&#039;&#039;, can be found under the tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; and allows the user to create new assignments for signal reader directly on the portal. This page will guide you through the basics of using the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Choosing a Signal Source==&lt;br /&gt;
First, you must select a signal source to base your new assignment on. Today, only custom vehicle types can be used for this, see Figure &amp;quot;Choosing a Signal Source&amp;quot;. If you would like to edit the Custom Vehicle types or create a new one, this can be done by admins under the administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel comfortable with which signal source you would like to use, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Create new assignment&#039;&#039;&#039;.[[File:Choose Signal Source.png|thumb|Choosing a Signal Source|600x600px|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Choose_Signal_Source.png]]In case the chosen Vehicle Profile has multiple A2L files per ECU a prompt will show up where it is possible to choose which A2L file to use per ECU. If no A2L file is chosen, that ECU is not used when creating the assignment.[[File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png|none|thumb|Choose A2L File Per ECU Popup|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:SignalReaderChooseA2LFilePerECU.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have chosen a signal source, you can start creating the assignment. The first tab that you are presented with is the &#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment global settings&#039;&#039;&#039; tab where you can add information about the assignment so that you can easily keep track of what this assignment is about. Creator and creation date are both automatically filled in and cannot be changed because of consistency.[[File:MeasurementSetup2.png|thumb|600x600px|Measurement Setups|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:MeasurementSetup2.png]][[File:Edit-DAQ2.png|thumb|600x600px|Edit DAQ|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Edit-DAQ2.png]]Under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Measurements&#039;&#039;&#039; tab, see Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;, you are presented to a table of Measurement Setups and an information window. These measurement setups are the core of a signal reader assignment. They contain &#039;&#039;&#039;Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; that activate and deactivate on certain conditions provided by the user. Each trigger can contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; that contains a list of certain signals that will be measured when the start condition for the respective trigger is met. A trigger can also be used to act as a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Measurement setups keep track of the signals that are present in them, as seen in Figure &amp;quot;Measurement Setups&amp;quot;. If a CCP signal is present in the measurement setup it is possible to assign it to an individual &#039;&#039;&#039;DAQ list&#039;&#039;&#039; by pressing Edit DAQ. This brings up the window in Figure &amp;quot;Edit DAQ&amp;quot;. Here you can drag and drop signals to the corresponding DAQ list that you which them to be in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you feel finished with the assignment you can simply click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the lower right corner to save the assignment in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
===Trigger===&lt;br /&gt;
To add a trigger to a measurement setup, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; button for the respective measurement setup. This will create a new Trigger in the trigger table in the respective measurement setup and the information window will be filled with new settings for this trigger for you to add.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the &#039;&#039;&#039;start trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;condition&#039;&#039;&#039; for the trigger. This is easiest to do in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit expression&#039;&#039;&#039; window that you can get to by clicking one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons. To find a new signal to add a condition for, use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Here, you can browse all signals available for this assignment. Use the dropdown to browse signals from different can-busses and Wice generic internal signals. If you want to browse the signals currently in use in the assignment for the selected signal source, check the &#039;&#039;&#039;Search in assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; box. If you want more information about a signal, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;More info&#039;&#039;&#039;. When you have found the signal you want, double click it or select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add signal&#039;&#039;&#039;. Now you can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;Operators&#039;&#039;&#039; list to add a condition for the signal, for example &amp;quot; &amp;gt; 0&amp;quot;. When you are satisfied with the start condition, you will notice that the Validate button has a yellow warning symbol on it. This means that the expression is unvalidated, press the button to validate the expression. The buttons icon now either turns red (expression is unvalid) or green (expression is correct). See Figure &amp;quot;Validate Button States&amp;quot; for the different state of the validate button. Click Save to save the expression. The list of operators supported in trigger condition is available [[Signal Reader Trigger Expressions|here]].[[File:ValidateButtonStates.png|thumb|Validate Button States|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ValidateButtonStates.png]]A &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is not required, but can be supplied to determine when the recording should stop. If the stop condition is not supplied, the settings for the recorder will tell when the recording should stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the &#039;&#039;&#039;trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; to switch to/run a measurement setup when the start condition is met. Keep in mind though, that the setup switch will not run until all currently started recorders have at least fulfilled their &#039;&#039;&#039;minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039;. A trigger with a recorder cannot have a setup switch, but the recorder can.&lt;br /&gt;
===Recorder===&lt;br /&gt;
There a two types of recorder, SREC (Signal recorder) and DREC (Diagnostics recorder). Choose which one you want with the radio button at the top of the Recorder tab.&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder - DREC=====&lt;br /&gt;
DREC (Diagnostics recorder) is used to send diagnostic requests onto the vehicle&#039;s communication buses and record the responses. The diagnostic requests are supplied in a sequence file uploaded by the user. The sequence file contains one diagnostic request per line, with the ECU id at the beginning of the line. There can optionally be other information as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Recorder - SREC====&lt;br /&gt;
SREC (Signal recorder) is used to record signals on the busses.[[File:AddSignalsRecorder.png|thumb|600x600px|Add Signals for Recorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:AddSignalsRecorder.png]][[File:ImportSignalsText2.png|thumb|559x559px|Import signals from text|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:ImportSignalsText2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
=====SREC - Signals=====&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Signal&#039;&#039;&#039; button to open a window to add signals for recording. This window is much like the window for adding signals for the trigger, only differing in the fact that you can select multiple signals in this window. The selected signals for this recorder are shown in the right table, see Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. To add new signals to this table, you can either:&lt;br /&gt;
*Double click the signal,&lt;br /&gt;
*Drag and drop the signal&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the signal and click the right pointing arrow&lt;br /&gt;
Click the red symbol to the right of each signal to remove it. When you are done, click Ok to add the signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to &#039;&#039;&#039;import&#039;&#039;&#039; signals from a text file or directly from text as well as &#039;&#039;&#039;export&#039;&#039;&#039; signals as text. To do this, use the corresponding icon in the bottom right corner of the &amp;quot;Selected Symbols&amp;quot; list as senn in Figure &amp;quot;Add Signals for Recorder&amp;quot;. The figure &amp;quot;Import signals from text&amp;quot; gives an example on how the text file and text is expected to be structured when importing signals. Each line is expected to be a signal, with or without the module name. If the signal does not have a module name it is expected to belong to the already selected signal source/module. When importing CCP signals it is here possible to select which DAQ list that all found CCP signals should be assigned to, using the drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that you have added some signals, you can give them each a &#039;&#039;&#039;Skip factor&#039;&#039;&#039;, default 1, which is an integer that determines how often the signal should be recorded/stored when supplied. For example, a skip factor of 1 will record the signal every time it is supplied and a skip factor of 3 will record the signal every third sample.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;PLA-Compressions&#039;&#039;&#039; level can be set per signal by clicking on the pla column for the signal or select a row and click on “Edit PLA”. Read more [[PLA-compression window|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
=====Recorder  - Properties=====&lt;br /&gt;
Under the recorder tab &#039;&#039;&#039;Properties&#039;&#039;&#039; you can select the properties for the recorder, see Figure &amp;quot;Recorder Properties&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of shots&#039;&#039;&#039; is an important factor for a recorder. A &#039;&#039;&#039;shot&#039;&#039;&#039; is the term used for a single recording and number of shots is therefore the number of times we should record. A shot is only started when the start trigger condition is met and will continue until any of these events occur:&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the maximum duration.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and the &#039;&#039;&#039;stop trigger condition&#039;&#039;&#039; is met.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and a trigger start a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The recording fulfills the minimum duration and another recorder starts a &#039;&#039;&#039;setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*A setup switch is started manually.&lt;br /&gt;
*The assignment is stopped manually.&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder Setup switch&#039;&#039;&#039; is started when recorder has performed its number of shots and all other started recorders have at least fulfilled their minimum duration. It is, like the trigger setup switch, used to switch to/run a measurement setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Pre trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; which determines the amount of data that will be saved in the flash before the start trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Post trigg duration&#039;&#039;&#039; is much like the pre trigg duration and determines the amount of data that will be saved after the stop trigger condition is met. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Minimum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines the minimum amount of data that needs to be recorded before it becomes possible to cancel the recording through either a stop trigger or a setup swtich started by a trigger or another recorder.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum duration&#039;&#039;&#039; determines, as the name suggest, the maximum amount of data that should be recorded. Range is 0 to 4294967295 (2&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;32&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Unit&#039;&#039;&#039; for the four aforementioned durations can be set to seconds, samples or bytes. If you choose to set them to seconds, the device will use the timestamps of the incoming data to determine the four aforementioned durations.[[File:Recorder properties.png|thumb|600x600px|Recorder Properties|none|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:Recorder_properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
== Active signals ==&lt;br /&gt;
To create an active signal assignment the vehicle profile has to have a diagnostic description. This is set in the vehicle profile settings [[Vehicle Pofiles|here]]. There has to be a diagnostic description connected to the vehicle profile when the assignments are created to be able to select active signals. If a vehicle profile is updated a assignment can be upgraded to match the new vehicle profile by doing a copy. This will automatically upgrade it and if there is a diagnostic description connected it will be possible to use active signals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select “Active signal” in signal Source. Then it is possible to select ECU in ECU name. After that will possible signals show up and select/deselect works like for the other signal sources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a task with an assignment that has active signals connected a button “ECU SW mappings” will show up. If there is a red exclamation mark software version has to be selected for one or more ECU. If a recorder signal does not exist in the selected software version it will be removed. Note that the software version has to contain all active signals that exist in the trigger conditions otherwise it will not be possible to create the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:View assignments.png|thumb|600x600px|View Assignments|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/wice264/index.php/File:View_assignments.png]]In order to edit an already created assignment navigate to the tab where you choose a signal source and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button. This will display a window, see Figure &amp;quot;View Assignments&amp;quot;, which lists all of the saved assignments created through the editor, by whom and when it was created. In order to edit an assignment, select it and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; and you will start editing it. Simply click &#039;&#039;&#039;Save assignment&#039;&#039;&#039; when you are done and the old version of the assignment will be updated.&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy an assignment==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to copy an assignment and at the same time let it use the latest version of the assigned vehicle profile. To do this, click the &#039;&#039;&#039;View saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button, select the assignment you want to copy and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Copy&#039;&#039;&#039;. You will be prompted to enter a new name of the copied assignment, this must be a unique name. If the latest vehicle profile has multiple a2l description files per ECU, you will be prompted to select which one you want to use. If the assignment was first created using a specific description file for an ECU, that file will be pre-selected for that ECU so long as it still exists in the latest vehicle profile. Should signals in the original assignment not be found in the new signal sources for the copied assignment, these signals will be listed, prompting you if you still want to continue. If you choose to continue, these signals will be removed from the copied assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
==Using a portal assignment for a signal reader task==&lt;br /&gt;
In order to use a portal assignment. Select the WCUs in the Vehicle tab that you want to create the new signal reader assignment for and click new task. Navigate to the Signal reader tab and click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Browse saved assignments&#039;&#039;&#039; button and select the assignment you want to use and click &#039;&#039;&#039;Ok&#039;&#039;&#039;. This assignment will now be used to create the .haf file required by the WCUs to perform the signal reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Select different communication interface or transport protocol ==&lt;br /&gt;
Under the &amp;quot;Modules&amp;quot; tab, the different signal sources are visible. In the &amp;quot;I/O&amp;quot; column, the selected communication interface and transport protocol are shown. By selecting a row and then clicking on the button “Edit Interface” this can be changed. Currently this is only possible for modules with type “A2L” or &amp;quot;Diagnostics.&amp;quot; When changing this, a validation of the settings with what is red from the corresponding A2L file is done. If the validation is successful, a green icon will appear. If the icon is a red cross the A2L file does not contain the necessary information for the setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When selecting between CAN and Ethernet/DoIP diagnostics, a window pops up where you can select interface between &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;. Selecting &amp;quot;Default CAN&amp;quot; means the the CAN channel designated as &amp;quot;Default diagnostics channel&amp;quot; in the Signal Reader module settings will be used. If selecting &amp;quot;CAN&amp;quot; a specific CAN interface can be selected to be used for the diagnostic requests. If selecting &amp;quot;DoIP&amp;quot;, the diagnostics will be performed over Ethernet using the Diagnostics-over-IP (DoIP) protocol. In this case, you can also select whether to use the IP address broadcasted by the vehicle in a &amp;quot;Vehicle Announcement&amp;quot; message, or you can specify the IP address explicitly (in which case the Vehicle Announcement will be ignored). The DoIP port number to use (default 13400) can also be specified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DoIP-ass-ed.png|alt=CAN or DoIP settings|thumb|CAN or DoIP settings]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=ECU_List&amp;diff=2909</id>
		<title>ECU List</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=ECU_List&amp;diff=2909"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:21:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:Screenshot from 2021-02-19 09-57-15.png|thumb|500x500px|List of ECU:s]]&lt;br /&gt;
The ECU List offers you information on available ECUs in a specific vehicle. What information is available depends on [[Creating a Task#SoH|SoH task]]&amp;lt;nowiki/&amp;gt;s that have been run on the vehicle. For instance, if you have not selected to read the software versions from the ECUs that information will not be available in the ECU List. Also, if an SoH task has never been run for the vehicle, you will not be able to get this list at all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The panel consists of two main parts. The larger panel, &#039;&#039;&#039;the left panel&#039;&#039;&#039;, lists all the ECUs that have ever responded to any diagnostic request. &#039;&#039;&#039;The right hand panel&#039;&#039;&#039; shows the occasions when readouts have been done. The topmost entry in this panel is a bit special and is called &amp;quot;Last known&amp;quot;. This is a compilation of all ECUs and their latest information. This means that the diagnostic responses for the ECUs in the left panel can come from different read-out occasions. This view is meant to be an overview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As previously mentioned, the left panel shows occasions when read-outs have been performed. The occasion is simply a date and time with a number in parentheses afterwards. The number within the parentheses signifies the number of changes that has occurred between the readout on that date compared to the one before. This way you can easily identify which readouts that have any changes, and further investigate what has been changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &#039;&#039;&#039;left hand side&#039;&#039;&#039; is a set of columns available which are:&lt;br /&gt;
* ECU ID, which is the numerical ID for the ECU&lt;br /&gt;
* ECU name, if a description file is available for the vehicle the name is looked up (handled elsewhere)&lt;br /&gt;
* App Diagnostic part number, an identifying number referencing the diagnostics database &lt;br /&gt;
* SW#, a set of software numbers. The count is shown.&lt;br /&gt;
* DTC, the number of DTC:s available&lt;br /&gt;
* DM1:s, the number of DM1s available&lt;br /&gt;
* ECU Hardware numbers, serial numbers identifying the hardware&lt;br /&gt;
* Chassis number, the chassis number of the vehicle the ECU is installed in&lt;br /&gt;
Rows having an orange color means that this ECU has changes in the SoH responses between the selected date and the date before this. As each row is a specific ECU, a star &#039;*&#039; in a column signifies which specific vales has changed. Thus, if a row is uncolored, no changes has been detected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To further see information regarding SW#, DTC and DM1 simply double click the cell for the corresponding ECU or select the row and press the button available at the top of the table. This will open a new tab for the specific readout at the specific time. When entering a Software number, DTC or DM1 that has a ‘*’ (there is a difference between the readout) the current and previous readout will then show up. Note, some of the above selections might not be available for you as SoH services are enabled/disabled for your particular company&#039;s use case.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes responses from some ECUs are missing between readouts. As an example, let us say that for a selected readout there was a response regarding software numbers for an ECU but the readout before there was no response for that ECU. In this case it will not be flagged as changed as we do not know whether it was changed or not, just that it was missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Save/Load Views ===&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to right click on columns header and under “columns” to select which columns to display. Reorder the columns by dragging them and resize to the preferred size. After it is possible to save and load these by the button on bottom right. Read more about save and load [[Save View and Search Expressions|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Change display type ===&lt;br /&gt;
ECU Software numbers and ECU DTC:s could have different display types. Right click on the column header and under “Change display type” select from these:&lt;br /&gt;
* Only number of – Displays the number of responses the readout has.&lt;br /&gt;
* First value – Displays the first value of the responses and how many more that exists.&lt;br /&gt;
* All values – Displays all the values.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Timestamp of &amp;quot;Last known&amp;quot; ===&lt;br /&gt;
When Readout “last known” is selected the timestamp of the data is possible to get by doing either of these:&lt;br /&gt;
* On the button top left in the list, “Switch to timestamps”. These will change the values to show timestamp. To go back to values again, just click on the same button “Switch to values”.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hover on one data point and hover information with the timestamp will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Export to Excel ===&lt;br /&gt;
The specific readout that is selected can be exported to excel by right click on the columns header for the result and then select “Export to excel&amp;quot;.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=2908</id>
		<title>Creating a Task</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&amp;diff=2908"/>
		<updated>2022-01-21T07:11:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* SoH */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;includeonly&amp;gt;== Creating a Task==&amp;lt;/includeonly&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You create a new task by pressing the &amp;quot;New Task&amp;quot; button on the bottom of the &amp;quot;Tasks&amp;quot; tab. This will open a window where you choose the type of task you want to create. Note that it is not possible to create a new task for a WCU which has the system labels &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_in_progress&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;shelving_done&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;. However, if the WCU has the latter label, it is possible to unshelve it using the corresponding button in the bottom of the Vehicle-tab.  Here we will go through how to create tasks of each of the different kinds of tasks available. Remember that not all of the task types will be available as this depends on customer configuration and some types might not be enabled in the portal. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn about how to add resources to the task, check [[New task|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arcos ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arcos-task.png|alt=The dialog for creating an Arcos task.|thumb|The dialog for creating an Arcos task.]]&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. From version 2.71 the portal can interact with the Arcos-logger from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The file should have the extension &amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.ccmc&#039;&#039;&amp;quot;. When the task is downloaded the WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the Arcos - no upload will be required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Area5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Area5 new task.png|thumb|500x500px|Area5 task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Area5 tasks are used to read out data from the memory of ECUs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Assignment:&#039;&#039;&#039; To create a new Area5 task you first have to create an Area5 assignment in the [[Area5 Assignment Editor|Area5 Assignment Editor]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Validate ECU SW version on WCU:&#039;&#039;&#039; By checking this box, the WCU will validate that the ECU SW version of the task and the actual ECU are the same before starting the task. If they are different, it will not start the task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression:&#039;&#039;&#039; The task can be started by an expression. This option lets the user specify start trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). For an explanation of trigger conditions look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sync Signal:&#039;&#039;&#039; It is possible to specify a signal with given values that will be sent when the Area5 task starts and stops. This can be used to synchronize the Area5 read-out with external measurements systems like the M-Log.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Audio ==&lt;br /&gt;
An audio task makes it possible to record audio from a connected microphone. An audio recording can be started in five ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: to initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the audio recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: initiate the recording by a trigger expression in a Signal Reader assignment. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the audio recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Audio_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of triggers look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Audio level&#039;&#039;&#039;: Start the trigger once the microphone registers volume above a certain threshold.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time which is only valid in the cases of trigger button, signal reader, expression and audio level above. As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the audio has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified. This can be handy when you press the trigger button to make a comment about an event where the event was audible.[[File:Skärmavbild 2019-12-18 kl. 14.28.52.png|alt=Audio task|thumb|Audio task]]A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to monitor the audio live. To do this, check the box &amp;quot;Monitoring&amp;quot;. To listen to the live audio you should use a tool such as [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is more information about audio in WICE [[Wice audio|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio tasks can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Blue piraT ==&lt;br /&gt;
The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be configured with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconfigured with a special software package (i.e. an &amp;quot;extra bundle&amp;quot;). Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CAN-recorder == &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CanrecorderIllust.png|thumb|Canrecorder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged. This task has four options described in Figure &amp;quot;Canrecorder&amp;quot; and below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the grid, select which bus (or buses) to record from. By clicking the check box in the top left corner, you can select all buses at once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Specify which CAN frames you want to record by entering their CAN IDs in the CAN frame ID column in the grid, on the same row as the bus you have selected, or by entering the IDs in the text box labeled “Set filters on selected CAN buses”. If you use the latter option, the filters will be set on all of the buses you have selected. To enter a filter on a specific bus use the method of entering the filter on the same row as the selected bus, on the grid. This can only be done if the CAN frame passthrough filter is turned on. Turning off the CAN frame passthrough filter option will disable the CAN frame ID column in the grid. Press the “Clear All” button to remove all the entered filters from all buses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Turning on or off a CAN frame pass-through filter. If you choose to have the filter on you must specify which CAN bus or CAN buses you wish to record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Select how long time to record before and after the trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Scheduling=== &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For WCUs with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 this task can be scheduled by selecting the &amp;quot;Add schedule&amp;quot;-checkbox. By doing so, the panel shown in Figure &amp;quot;Schedule Panel&amp;quot; appears. By thereafter selecting the &amp;quot;ASAP&amp;quot; checkbox, the task will be performed once and as soon as possible. If instead the task is to be performed at a specified time, deselect the &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot;-checkboxes and select the sought time in the &amp;quot;Start field&amp;quot;. The task can also be performed within a certain time span, and in this case &amp;quot;Time span&amp;quot; should be checked and the Date in &amp;quot;End&amp;quot; field specified. Repetition of the task is defined by checking the &amp;quot;Repeat&amp;quot; checkbox, defining a interval size in the field after &amp;quot;Every&amp;quot; and a recurrence rate in the drop down menu. The task will then be repeated at this rate until the date defined in the &amp;quot;Until&amp;quot; field is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration Schedule.png|thumb|left|600px|Schedule Panel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To control the time zone in which the task scheduling is to be performed the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox is used. If this option is deselected, the task will be performed in UTC-time (the date fields present the portal local time). On the other hand, if this box is checked, the task will be performed according to the local time zone predefined for the WCU. A WCU time zone can be defined for a WCU with version &amp;gt;= 2.53 by an administrator using &amp;quot;Edit configuration&amp;quot; in the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Vehicles Tab|Vehicles panel]]. This is useful when there is a need to perform a certain task at a specific time of the day regardless of which country the vehicle is in. For instance, when selecting 100 different WCUs scheduled to perform a task at 10:00, checking the &amp;quot;WCU local time&amp;quot;-checkbox will result in them performing the task according to their time zone setting. Without checking this option, the task will be performed in the corresponding UTC-time, which could mean in the middle of the day or night depending on where the vehicle is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Diagnostic Log and Trace (DLT) ==&lt;br /&gt;
DLT itself provides a log and trace interface, based on the standardised protocol specified in the AUTOSAR standard 4.0 DLT. A DLT task in the WICE Portal makes it possible to collect such logs in a vehicle where this functionality is available and transfer the data to the WICE portal where logs can be downloaded for further analysis. For a more in-depth description, you can go [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon here]. Currently this task type supports filtering of logs on the WCU by entering filter expressions into the text area &amp;quot;Filters&amp;quot;, one on each line. For an explanation on how to write such filters, see [https://github.com/GENIVI/dlt-daemon#learn-more here]. For a description of the settings of the module DLT, see [[DLT Module|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ETAS ==&lt;br /&gt;
Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be configured, and measurement data offloaded and accessed through the WICE Portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating an ETAS task, the task description file you select must be a .exp file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ethernet capture ==&lt;br /&gt;
This kind of task is used to capture packet data from one of the ethernet interfaces on the WCU. The basics for this kind of task is that you choose the interface you would like to capture from and a capture expression to filter which packets you are interested in. The results from this task type is pcap files. To read more about this task type, go [[Ethernet capture|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== IDC ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests are uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with &amp;quot;.seq&amp;quot;). This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== M-Log ==&lt;br /&gt;
The WICE system can interact with external loggers as well. One such logger is called M-Log from Ipetronik. You create your measure task using an external tool which creates a file which you can upload for this type of task. The WICE system will then forward this file to the external logger. The WICE system can also take care of uploading the result files as well where you can retrieve the files using this portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the &amp;quot;Use existing measurement configuration&amp;quot; checkbox if a measurement setup file already exists on the MLOG - no upload will be required (Available from WCU version 2.66).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mlog-20210216-160132.png|thumb|M-Log task]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MQTT ==&lt;br /&gt;
A MQTT task makes it possible to record data from a MQTT message broker, by specifying a specific topic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rapid prototyping ==&lt;br /&gt;
A Rapid prototyping (RP) task makes it possible to download RP binaries to multiple WCUs and keep track of the result files the RP task might produce. For more information about RP, see [[WICE RP How-To]] and [[WICE RP Manual]].&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rapid prototyping task.png|thumb|Rapid prototyping task]]&lt;br /&gt;
The rapid prototyping tab can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Rapid prototyping task&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An RP task must consist of at least an &#039;RP binary&#039; or a &#039;Web application zip file&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoftHub ==&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub is a measurement system that can be run either as a stand alone unit or as a software module on the WCU, with functionality similat to the Singnal Reader module. A SoftHub task is created much in the same way as a Signal Reader task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a SoftHub task, you select a .shub task file, and then proceed in the same way as the Signal Reader task. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SoftHub task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;server triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the task that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Signal Reader == &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Illustration SignalReader.png|thumb|271x271px|Signal reader task]]&lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader is a data capture module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN and FlexRay signals, as well as diagnostics data, and ECU-internal signals read by CCP or XCP. To create a Signal Reader task you proceed as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. You either select an assignment file of .haf format, or choose an assignment created in the assignment creator (see [[Signal Reader Assignment Wizard]]). Your current choice will be displayed in the &amp;quot;Chosen file&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When you have selected an assignment and one or more WCUs, the CAN buses defined in the assignment and on the WCU will be mapped. If they can be automatically mapped a green check symbol will be displayed, otherwise a red cross will be displayed. Clicking the mapping button will open the mapper. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to each other manually and then save. Once this is done correctly, the red cross will become a green check mark, indicating that the mappings are ready to be automatically applied upon submit. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. With a Signal Reader task you can monitor CAN, FlexRay, ODB-II and WCU-internal signals live by selecting &amp;quot;Monitor signals&amp;quot;. When selected, two boxes will appear under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the signals to be monitored are listed. You can later see the monitored signals by pressing the &#039;&#039;&#039;Monitor Signals&#039;&#039;&#039; button either in the Tasks tab or in the Vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their data source names as a prefix (e.g. CAN1.EngineSpeed instead of EngineSpeed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. The Signal Reader task will generate result files. It may be interesting to know if certain signals reach certain values in these result files, therefore it is possible to add &#039;&#039;&#039;Server Triggers&#039;&#039;&#039; to the assignment that will trigger and add a suitable label to the corresponding result file. Read more about this [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Signal reader task can be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Signal Broker === &lt;br /&gt;
Signal Reader can act as a Signal Broker for other software components. For instance, the audio and video modules relies on the Signal Broker API of Signal Reader for evaluating start and stop trigger expressions. Moreover, the Signal Broker gives programmatical access to signals for Rapid Prototyping tasks.  Read more about this in [[WICE Signal Broker API]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Files containing references to sequence files === &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFileForSignalreader.png|thumb|right|Sequence Files References in .haf File]] &lt;br /&gt;
If the measurement file contains references to sequence files, you are also required to select these in order to run the task. The portal scans the .haf file for such entries and presents this to you, see illustration 4.2. Click the button for each sequence file reference to upload each sequence file needed. Some requests in the sequence file may be for reading DTCs, and in such cases you can select the option of also reading associated &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. An example of this can found in Figure &amp;quot;Sequence Files References in .haf File&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SequenceFilesForSignalreaderWithFunctionalQuery.png|thumb|right|Sequence File with Functional Query]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, the .haf file contained two references to sequence files. As no sequence files have yet been uploaded, the selection for reading snapshot or extended data is grayed out. In Figure &amp;quot;Sequence File with Functional Query&amp;quot; we have selected one such sequence file containing (functional) DTC requests. Here we have checked that we would like to read &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;. It is also possible to select both &#039;&#039;Snapshots&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Extended data&#039;&#039;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WICE internal signals ===&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to CAN and FlexRay signals, a number of internal signals (i.e. internal to the WCU) are also available. The following WICE-internal signals are supported: [[WICE Internal Signals|WICE Internal Signals]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SoH ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot from 2021-04-01 09-43-34.png|thumb|799x799px|SoH]]&lt;br /&gt;
A State of Health (SoH) task collects specific status information from vehicles. You select which information you want the task to collect by filling in one or more of the checkboxes shown in Figure &amp;quot;SoH&amp;quot;. The number of checkboxes shown can vary depending on the WICE installation. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (e.g. SDDB) for the vehicles executing the SoH task may have to been available. To add such a description file for a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog|The Edit Car Dialog]].The six different options are:&lt;br /&gt;
*Mileage&lt;br /&gt;
*Voltage&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU software numbers&lt;br /&gt;
*Read ECU DTC:s (optionally including &#039;Snapshot&#039; and &#039;Extended data&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
*Read OBD-II PIDs&lt;br /&gt;
*App Diagnotstic Db Part Num&lt;br /&gt;
*DM1, Diagnostic Message using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Odometer, reading the odometer using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
*Clear DTCs. &lt;br /&gt;
**If reading DTCs is requested as well, those will be read before clearing the DTCs. (available from WCU version 2.63)&lt;br /&gt;
**If this option (Clear DTC) is chosen it is optionally possible to set a PIN code for unlocking a gateway module - e.g. Vehicle Gateway Module (VGM). (Available from WCU version 2.66)&lt;br /&gt;
*Engine hours, reading engine hours using the [[wikipedia:SAE_J1939|j1939 protocol]] (available from WCU version 2.64). The result for this can be read in the generated j1939-file from the task. It is a text type of file. In addition, a system value label called &#039;engine_hours&#039; (as default, can be changed on a customer basis). This label shows the latest read value and is available on the vehicle.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some selections above might not be available to you as this is a configuration setting depending on customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SWDL ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UpdateWikiSWDL.png|thumb|791x791px|New SWDL task]]&lt;br /&gt;
A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs. The PIN codes should be in the format of five hexadecimal numbers, e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff:00:1a:2c:77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (or alternatively, omitting the colon separator, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;ff001a2c77&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;). When a SWDL task has been created and assigned to one or more WCUs, it will cause all vbf files to be downloaded to the WCUs, and then the actual re-programming can be triggered by the vehicle user through the WCU status GUI web interface. The uploaded vbf-files are presented in a table along with its ECU and software part type (SW part type). In a separate table, the PIN codes for each ECU are presented along with the total number of files uploaded per WCU, see Figure &amp;quot;New SWDL task&amp;quot;. To get an overview of how the files relate to the ECUs it is possible to choose the &amp;quot;Group by&amp;quot;-option when right clicking the ECU column in the file table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-update sequence file and/or a post-update sequence file&#039;&#039;&#039;. The diagnostic requests of those sequence files will be sent before and after the ECU re-programming respectively.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include one &#039;&#039;&#039;signature file&#039;&#039;&#039; (containing checksums). The file is assumed to be a .xml-file. (Available from WCU version 2.66) If either of the optional files is selected, a field will appear to the right of the chosen file. This field will contain the name of the chosen file. (Available from WCU version 2.70)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally include a &#039;&#039;&#039;VGM unlock&#039;&#039;&#039; access control mechanism, with a PIN code for the VGM node. This is specifically for vehicles requiring this kind of access control for ECU re-programming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By checking the box &#039;&#039;&#039;Run SoH after completion&#039;&#039;&#039; it is possible to let the SWDL task run the WCUs SoH task after the SWDL task is completed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SWDL tasks can optionally contain a &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger Expression&#039;&#039;&#039; which must be fulfilled within a specified time limit (&amp;quot;Wait time&amp;quot;) for ECU re-programming to be allowed. The trigger expression follows the same syntax as Signal Reader trigger expressions (or [[Server Trigger|Server Triggers]], audio/video triggers), and should be built up from signals being measured in a Signal Reader assignment. The user must make sure that there is a Signal Reader assignment on the WCUs of the SWDL task, with the signals of the trigger expression being measured.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to choose to &#039;&#039;&#039;ignore checksums&#039;&#039;&#039; and/or &#039;&#039;&#039;disable pre-programming&#039;&#039;&#039; using the corresponding checkboxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SWDL module can be [[The Portal Administrator View#Configure the Software Download Module|configured]] to perform SWDL either over CAN or over Ethernet (DoIP).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Video ==&lt;br /&gt;
A video task makes it possible to record and monitor live video from one or two cameras attached to a WCU. You can trigger recording of video in four ways:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger button&#039;&#039;&#039;: To initiate the recording you need to attach a button to the WCU in order to start in the video recording.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signal reader&#039;&#039;&#039;: Initiate the recording when a recorder in a Signal Reader assignment starts. The recording is started as soon as a Signal Reader &#039;&#039;recorder&#039;&#039; is started. You specify the name of the Signal Reader recorder (e.g. SREC_0) you want to start the video recording. You can also enter &amp;quot;auto&amp;quot; as the recorder name, in which case a recorder that include the Video_Device_n internal signal will be selected. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Expression&#039;&#039;&#039;: Similar to the &#039;Signal reader&#039; trigger option, the &#039;Expression&#039; option lets the user specify start and stop trigger conditions based on logical expressions containing signals measured by the Signal Reader module. Note that the user must make sure the signals present in the expression are actually measured (otherwise the expression will never be true). Unlike the &#039;Signal Reader&#039; trigger, there does not have to be a recorder configured in the Signal Reader measurement assignment. For an explanation of how to enter triggers, have a look [[Server Trigger|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039;: start the recording as soon as possible. (Use this with caution, since it tends to produce prohibitively large video files.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to this, you can set the &#039;&#039;&#039;pre-trig&#039;&#039;&#039; time (not valid in the cases of the &#039;None&#039; trigger option above). As an example, let&#039;s assume the trigger button method is selected. At the moment the trigger button is pressed the video has already been recorded for the number of seconds specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A maximum &#039;&#039;&#039;duration&#039;&#039;&#039; of the recording can also be set, in seconds from the start trigger event. If there is a stop trigger expression specified, the recording will be stopped either when the stop expression is fulfilled or the max duration is passed, whichever occurs first. If you do not enter a duration it will be set to a default value of 120 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If monitoring of video from a WCU is enabled, a live video stream will be transmitted which can be viewed using a RTP-based video tool, for instance [http://confero.alkit.se Alkit Confero]. This task can also be scheduled in the same manner as described for the Canrecoder task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about the video support in WICE [[WICE_video|here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Applicable for all types ==&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Site specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Announce result file availability ====&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled at your site, there might be an opportunity to announce to third party applications that a result file is available using a [[wikipedia:Jakarta_Messaging|JMS API]]. By checking this box, as soon as a result file is added in the back-end this will be signaled using a customer specific event. The check box title is &amp;quot;Announce result file availability&amp;quot;, this can be seen in the image in [[#SoH|SoH]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Retention time ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Retention time.png|thumb|435x435px|Retention time]]&lt;br /&gt;
This function works by setting a retention time in days which simply says that data coming in from the task, i.e. result files and positions will be kept the set number of days from when the data was collected. If, e.g. setting the retention time for an task to 30 days, will keep data until it is 30 days old where it will be automatically removed. See image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to set a default retention time for resource groups. To do this, add a global value label named &#039;&#039;&#039;RETENTION_TIME&#039;&#039;&#039; to the resource group and give it an appropriate value. This value will then be used as a template value when creating a new task for this resource group. If multiple resource groups have this label and they have different values, the one with the lowest/shortest retention time value will be chosen as the template value.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Labels&amp;diff=2906</id>
		<title>Labels</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Labels&amp;diff=2906"/>
		<updated>2022-01-18T08:23:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Add labels to resources */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;From version 2.45 the concept of labels has been introduced in the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add labels to resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can currently be added to WCUs, vehicles and resource groups. In the [[Vehicles|Vehicles tab]], search out your resource, right click and choose &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot; as illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Adding Label to Resource&amp;quot;. In the sub menu you can choose to either add or remove labels, the latter of which is only possible if the selected resources are associated with such.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When choosing to add labels, a new window as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Adding Label Dialog&amp;quot; will show up. Using the checkboxes it is possible to either add labels to the selected WCU, the connected vehicle or both. In the &amp;quot;Add labels&amp;quot;-selector, you can choose to add an already existing label from the drop down menu. If the desired label does not exist, you will get the opportunity to create it by pressing the enter key. This will open up the window as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot;. When clicking &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the new label will be temporarily added to the resource as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Label Temporarily Added&amp;quot;. Here you have the option to add another label by repeating the previous step.  When finished, save the label(s) added to the current resource by clicking &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu.png|Adding Label to Resource&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu2.png|Adding Label Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu3.png|Creating Label Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu4.png|Label Temporarily Added&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a label you also have the option to set a value if &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; are enabled for the label of interest. See screenshot &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot; above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If values are enabled, the new label or the selected label has a small filter icon as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Show value selector&amp;quot; below. If this icon is clicked, a new value can either be selected by typing in the selector or by using the drop down menu. For a new label, the drop down menu is always empty. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a resource already has a label with a value associated, the value can be replaced by adding the label again with a different value. The value can also be removed by adding the label without a label associated. The value can also be changed directly if you edit the labels via the [[#Manage labels on multiple resources|Manage labels on multiple resources]] in Vehicles. &amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add value.png|Show value selector&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add value2.png|Select or type value&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a label from a resource, select the &amp;quot;Remove labels from resources&amp;quot; option in the submenu of &amp;quot;Manage labels on resources&amp;quot;. Doing so, results in  the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Removing label from Resource Dialog&amp;quot;, which shows a list of all labels associated with the selected resources. To remove a label simply click it, resulting in it being grayed out, see Figure &amp;quot;Label Removed from Resource&amp;quot;. When pressing &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the deselected labels are removed from all selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels remove.png|Removing label from Resource Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels remove2.png|Label Removed from Resource&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can currently only be managed on resources via the [[Vehicles]] tab. See [[#Labels in Vehicles]] for more info about adding labels while modifying other resource attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global and private labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu5.png|thumb|150x150px|Private Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default all user created labels in the WICE portal are global meaning that they are visible for every logged in user. When creating a new label, as in Figure &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot; in [[#Add labels to resources]], you have the option make the label private by ticking the &amp;quot;Private&amp;quot; checkbox as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Private Label&amp;quot;. A private labels renders with rounded corners as opposite to global labels which renders with sharp corners. Compare the Figure &amp;quot;Private Label&amp;quot; with any of the figures in [[#Add labels to resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Private labels are, as the name suggests, only visible for the one who created it. In [[#Administrate labels]], there is a feature to turn private labels global.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two types of system labels; WCU software version and MX4 firmware version. System labels are labels created by the system and can not be added to the resource by a user. These labels are typically added to a resource (WCU) when its software changes or when to describe which software (and firmware) a WCU had at a certain time. More about this in [[#Labels in Tasks]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Values for labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.64 it is possible to add values to labels in the WICE Portal. Values for labels makes it possible to use labels as a way to dynamically add new attributes (e.g vehicle colour etc) to resources and use the values to filter resources in the [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] or the [[Vehicles]] tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A value for an existing label can only be added if the the &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; option is turned on for the label of interest. See [[#Administer labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add value.png|thumb|A label where &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; is turned on]]&lt;br /&gt;
If one wants to add a value to a new label when adding the new label to a resource, the &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; options needs to be turned on when the label is created as described in [[Labels#Add labels to resources|Add labels to resources]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a resource has a label with a value associated, the value can be used to further filter the resources in the  [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] or [[Vehicles]] tab. See [[#Search by label values|Search by label values]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Vehicles]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu6.png|thumb|150x150px|Labels in Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Labels in Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; illustrates how the Vehicles tab looks like when we have searched out a resource associated with a label. A resource associated with a label as a small label icon before the &amp;quot;WCU ID&amp;quot; if the resource is a WCU or a resource group or before the &amp;quot;Plate number&amp;quot; if the resource is a car. When hovering the label icon, all associated labels on that resource pops up. The labels can be global labels added by other users, private labels added by the currently logged in user or system labels added by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
Labels are added directly to a resource as described in section [[#Add labels to resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage labels on resource ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu7.png|thumb|150x150px|Edit WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
Labels on a resource can be managed (add or remove labels) as described in [[#Add labels to resources]]. Alternatively, if only one resource is selected, the &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;[[The Portal Administrator View#The Edit Car Dialog|Edit Car]]&amp;quot; button can be used for a WCU or Car, respectively. The Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot; dialog. To remove the label &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot;, simply click the label and it will disappear. The new state of the WCU is not saved until we click the button &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.  In this view we also have the option to add other labels exactly in the same way as we described in [[#Add labels to resources]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage labels on multiple resources ===&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 it is possible to manage labels on multiple resources at once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage labels on multiple resources, search out the resources(in the Vehicles tab), right click and choose one of the options under  &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot; to either add or remove labels, as described in [[#Add labels to resources]]. This will give you the window in Figure &amp;quot;Add Label to Multiple Resources&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done if the selected rows are resource groups or WCUs/Cars, not both. If one or more resource groups are selected it is possible to add the label to the WCUs  and/or Cars in the group(s) and/or the resource group it self using the dialog checkboxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search by labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
Above the regular search criteria filter editors there is a &amp;quot;Search by labels&amp;quot; widget as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Search by Labels&amp;quot;. This widget let the user to include one or many labels in the search criteria which is further specified using the drop down menu with the three options &amp;quot;Match any&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Match all&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Match none&amp;quot;, where the foremost is the default choice.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels search.png|thumb|800px|left|Search by Labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match any&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources which have any of the selected labels attached. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match all&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources with all of the selected labels attached. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match none&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources where the resources with the selected labels are excluded &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also note that in Figure &amp;quot;Search by Labels&amp;quot; there is a checkbox option: &amp;quot;Show all private labels&amp;quot;. This is only available for administrators and enables the user to also retrieve private labels created by other users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search by label values ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a selected label has &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; feature turned on (See [[Labels#Values for labels|Values for labels)]] the search criteria can be further narrowed by providing a value search criteria. A value search criteria is either added by simply typing the criteria or by selecting an available value via the drop down menu. When typing the criteria, regular expressions matching multiple values can also be used. See screenshot &amp;quot;Filter by value using regular expression&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Label value expression.png|thumb|Filter by value using regular expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add label with values as a column ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ease filtering and use values for labels as a way to add dynamic attributes to resources (as mentioned in [[Labels#Values for labels|Values for labels)]] a label (with values enabled) can be added as resource type column to the Vehicles grid by right clicking the label. If the label has values enabled the context menu in the screenshot &amp;quot;Add as column&amp;quot; is displayed. If the label is added as a column, the column is added to the grid as seen in screenshot &amp;quot;Vehicle column&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This column can then be treated as any column in terms of filtering and sorting. When adding a label as a column, the column will be used to filter and show values for the selected resource type. In other words, if you add the column &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; as a vehicle column, the column will show the values for all vehicles that have the label &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; associated and have values selected for that label. The column will not show the values if the only WCU connected to the vehicle has the label &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; associated. These values are shown only if the label is added as a WCU column. The selected resource type is displayed via an icon as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Vehicle column&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add as column.png|Add as column&lt;br /&gt;
File:Vehicle colour column.png|Vehicle column&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the tasks tab it is possible to search for labels in the same way as described in [[#Search by labels]]. The difference for this tab compared to the Vehicles tab is that the labels associated with a resource, are the labels that were associated with the resource when the assignment was created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Resource Labels for a Task ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Figure &amp;quot;Label Associated with WCU&amp;quot; shows the labels associated with the WCU &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; for task 7663. The only label is a [[#System label]] that was automatically added to the WCU when the task was created. This means that there were no other global or private labels associated with this WCU when task 7663 was created.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illustration &amp;quot;System Label Associated with WCU&amp;quot; shows the labels associated with &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; for task 7664. In addition to the system label, we have the &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot; label. This means that the WCU &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; had the label &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot; when task 7664 was created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu9.png|Label Associated with WCU&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu10.png|System Label Associated with WCU&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assignment labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu11.png|thumb|200px|right|Labels Added to Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can not be added to a assignment by a user but the system can add system labels to a assignment if the assignment is either running, pending or stopped pending. These labels are not visible for a result row in the same way as resource labels but are instead accessible if one selects a row and presses the button &amp;quot;View assignment&amp;quot;. An example can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Labels Added to Assignment&amp;quot;. If the WCU software and/or MX4 firmware is changed while a assignment is either running, pending or stopped pending, a system label describing the change will be added to the assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Search Tab|Search]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu12.png|thumb|200px|Search Tab Label Widget]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Search Tab|search tab]] has a new labels widget as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Search Tab Label Widge&amp;quot;. This widget works in the same way as for the [[#Labels in Tasks|Tasks tab]]. When searching for labels in the [[Search Tab|search tab]] we are searching for labels in the same way as for the tasks tab, e.g labels that were associated with WCUs and/or cars when the tasks were created. If we include system labels in the label search criteria, we are also including assignment labels among the the resource types we are searching in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administer labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Administration Tab]] there is a &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot; tab where users can administrate their private labels and administrators can administrate all labels in the system. Here it is possible to search for labels either by label name, creator or status both in terms of global/private and enabled/disabled. The status based search is based on a checkbox which has three modes: unselected, checked or unchecked. The checked and unchecked option initiates a search matching the selected choice. However, the default setting is unselected, which is represented by a gray checkbox, and it shows hits disregarding its status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enable/disable labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu13.png|thumb|200px|Enable/Disable Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can be enabled or disabled by checking/unchecking the checkbox in the &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot; column as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Enable/Disable Label&amp;quot;. The changes are instant when checking the checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled labels can not be added to resources and are not visible in the &amp;quot;Search by labels&amp;quot; widgets. They are however visible when when hovering a resource in the Tasks tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rename label ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu14.png|thumb|200px|Edit Label Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
A label can be renamed by clicking the label in the labels grid. An &amp;quot;Edit label&amp;quot; window will popup as can be seen in illustration &amp;quot;Edit Label Dialog&amp;quot;. To rename the label, simply edit the text box and click save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administrator specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator there are some more features in the labels administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Show all private labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
When checking the &amp;quot;Show all private labels&amp;quot; checkbox, all private labels in the system will be visible when searching. In this way, an administrator can edit other users private labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Turn private label global ====&lt;br /&gt;
When clicking a label (as described in [[#Rename label]]) an administrator can choose to turn a private label global. This has to be done with some care since it is not possible to turn a global label private again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Enabled values.png|thumb|Enable values for existing labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable values for label ====&lt;br /&gt;
Values for an existing label can be added by checking &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; in the Edit label dialog. Note that when values has been enabled, this can not be disabled again.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Labels&amp;diff=2905</id>
		<title>Labels</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.alkit.se/wice293/index.php?title=Labels&amp;diff=2905"/>
		<updated>2022-01-18T08:22:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Mathias: /* Add labels to resources */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;From version 2.45 the concept of labels has been introduced in the WICE portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Add labels to resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can currently be added to WCUs, vehicles and resource groups. In the [[Vehicles|Vehicles tab]], search out your resource, right click and choose &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot; as illustrated in Figure &amp;quot;Adding Label to Resource&amp;quot;. In the sub menu you can choose to either add or remove labels, the latter of which is only possible if the selected resources are associated with such.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When choosing to add labels, a new window as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Adding Label Dialog&amp;quot; will show up. Using the checkboxes it is possible to either add labels to the selected WCU, the connected car or both. In the &amp;quot;Add labels&amp;quot;-selector, you can choose to add an already existing label from the drop down menu. If the desired label does not exist, you will get the opportunity to create it by pressing the enter key. This will open up the window as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot;. When clicking &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the new label will be temporarily added to the resource as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Label Temporarily Added&amp;quot;. Here you have the option to add another label by repeating the previous step.  When finished, save the label(s) added to the current resource by clicking &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu.png|Adding Label to Resource&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu2.png|Adding Label Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu3.png|Creating Label Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu4.png|Label Temporarily Added&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a label you also have the option to set a value if &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; are enabled for the label of interest. See screenshot &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot; above. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If values are enabled, the new label or the selected label has a small filter icon as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Show value selector&amp;quot; below. If this icon is clicked, a new value can either be selected by typing in the selector or by using the drop down menu. For a new label, the drop down menu is always empty. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a resource already has a label with a value associated, the value can be replaced by adding the label again with a different value. The value can also be removed by adding the label without a label associated. The value can also be changed directly if you edit the labels via the [[#Manage labels on multiple resources|Manage labels on multiple resources]] in Vehicles. &amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add value.png|Show value selector&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add value2.png|Select or type value&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a label from a resource, select the &amp;quot;Remove labels from resources&amp;quot; option in the submenu of &amp;quot;Manage labels on resources&amp;quot;. Doing so, results in  the dialog presented in Figure &amp;quot;Removing label from Resource Dialog&amp;quot;, which shows a list of all labels associated with the selected resources. To remove a label simply click it, resulting in it being grayed out, see Figure &amp;quot;Label Removed from Resource&amp;quot;. When pressing &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; the deselected labels are removed from all selected resources.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels remove.png|Removing label from Resource Dialog&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels remove2.png|Label Removed from Resource&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can currently only be managed on resources via the [[Vehicles]] tab. See [[#Labels in Vehicles]] for more info about adding labels while modifying other resource attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Global and private labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu5.png|thumb|150x150px|Private Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
By default all user created labels in the WICE portal are global meaning that they are visible for every logged in user. When creating a new label, as in Figure &amp;quot;Creating Label Dialog&amp;quot; in [[#Add labels to resources]], you have the option make the label private by ticking the &amp;quot;Private&amp;quot; checkbox as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Private Label&amp;quot;. A private labels renders with rounded corners as opposite to global labels which renders with sharp corners. Compare the Figure &amp;quot;Private Label&amp;quot; with any of the figures in [[#Add labels to resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Private labels are, as the name suggests, only visible for the one who created it. In [[#Administrate labels]], there is a feature to turn private labels global.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== System labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently there are two types of system labels; WCU software version and MX4 firmware version. System labels are labels created by the system and can not be added to the resource by a user. These labels are typically added to a resource (WCU) when its software changes or when to describe which software (and firmware) a WCU had at a certain time. More about this in [[#Labels in Tasks]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Values for labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
From version 2.64 it is possible to add values to labels in the WICE Portal. Values for labels makes it possible to use labels as a way to dynamically add new attributes (e.g vehicle colour etc) to resources and use the values to filter resources in the [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] or the [[Vehicles]] tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A value for an existing label can only be added if the the &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; option is turned on for the label of interest. See [[#Administer labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add value.png|thumb|A label where &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; is turned on]]&lt;br /&gt;
If one wants to add a value to a new label when adding the new label to a resource, the &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; options needs to be turned on when the label is created as described in [[Labels#Add labels to resources|Add labels to resources]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a resource has a label with a value associated, the value can be used to further filter the resources in the  [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] or [[Vehicles]] tab. See [[#Search by label values|Search by label values]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Vehicles]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu6.png|thumb|150x150px|Labels in Vehicles Tab]]&lt;br /&gt;
Figure &amp;quot;Labels in Vehicles Tab&amp;quot; illustrates how the Vehicles tab looks like when we have searched out a resource associated with a label. A resource associated with a label as a small label icon before the &amp;quot;WCU ID&amp;quot; if the resource is a WCU or a resource group or before the &amp;quot;Plate number&amp;quot; if the resource is a car. When hovering the label icon, all associated labels on that resource pops up. The labels can be global labels added by other users, private labels added by the currently logged in user or system labels added by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
Labels are added directly to a resource as described in section [[#Add labels to resources]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage labels on resource ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu7.png|thumb|150x150px|Edit WCU Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
Labels on a resource can be managed (add or remove labels) as described in [[#Add labels to resources]]. Alternatively, if only one resource is selected, the &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;[[The Portal Administrator View#The Edit Car Dialog|Edit Car]]&amp;quot; button can be used for a WCU or Car, respectively. The Figure &amp;quot;Edit WCU Dialog&amp;quot; shows the &amp;quot;Edit WCU&amp;quot; dialog. To remove the label &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot;, simply click the label and it will disappear. The new state of the WCU is not saved until we click the button &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;.  In this view we also have the option to add other labels exactly in the same way as we described in [[#Add labels to resources]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage labels on multiple resources ===&lt;br /&gt;
From portal version 2.47 it is possible to manage labels on multiple resources at once. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage labels on multiple resources, search out the resources(in the Vehicles tab), right click and choose one of the options under  &amp;quot;Manage labels&amp;quot; to either add or remove labels, as described in [[#Add labels to resources]]. This will give you the window in Figure &amp;quot;Add Label to Multiple Resources&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be done if the selected rows are resource groups or WCUs/Cars, not both. If one or more resource groups are selected it is possible to add the label to the WCUs  and/or Cars in the group(s) and/or the resource group it self using the dialog checkboxes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search by labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
Above the regular search criteria filter editors there is a &amp;quot;Search by labels&amp;quot; widget as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Search by Labels&amp;quot;. This widget let the user to include one or many labels in the search criteria which is further specified using the drop down menu with the three options &amp;quot;Match any&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Match all&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Match none&amp;quot;, where the foremost is the default choice.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels search.png|thumb|800px|left|Search by Labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match any&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources which have any of the selected labels attached. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match all&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources with all of the selected labels attached. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Match none&#039;&#039; - Will show hits including resources where the resources with the selected labels are excluded &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also note that in Figure &amp;quot;Search by Labels&amp;quot; there is a checkbox option: &amp;quot;Show all private labels&amp;quot;. This is only available for administrators and enables the user to also retrieve private labels created by other users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search by label values ===&lt;br /&gt;
If a selected label has &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; feature turned on (See [[Labels#Values for labels|Values for labels)]] the search criteria can be further narrowed by providing a value search criteria. A value search criteria is either added by simply typing the criteria or by selecting an available value via the drop down menu. When typing the criteria, regular expressions matching multiple values can also be used. See screenshot &amp;quot;Filter by value using regular expression&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Label value expression.png|thumb|Filter by value using regular expressions]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add label with values as a column ===&lt;br /&gt;
To ease filtering and use values for labels as a way to add dynamic attributes to resources (as mentioned in [[Labels#Values for labels|Values for labels)]] a label (with values enabled) can be added as resource type column to the Vehicles grid by right clicking the label. If the label has values enabled the context menu in the screenshot &amp;quot;Add as column&amp;quot; is displayed. If the label is added as a column, the column is added to the grid as seen in screenshot &amp;quot;Vehicle column&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This column can then be treated as any column in terms of filtering and sorting. When adding a label as a column, the column will be used to filter and show values for the selected resource type. In other words, if you add the column &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; as a vehicle column, the column will show the values for all vehicles that have the label &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; associated and have values selected for that label. The column will not show the values if the only WCU connected to the vehicle has the label &amp;quot;Colour&amp;quot; associated. These values are shown only if the label is added as a WCU column. The selected resource type is displayed via an icon as can be seen in the screenshot &amp;quot;Vehicle column&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Add as column.png|Add as column&lt;br /&gt;
File:Vehicle colour column.png|Vehicle column&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Tasks Tab|Tasks]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the tasks tab it is possible to search for labels in the same way as described in [[#Search by labels]]. The difference for this tab compared to the Vehicles tab is that the labels associated with a resource, are the labels that were associated with the resource when the assignment was created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Resource Labels for a Task ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Figure &amp;quot;Label Associated with WCU&amp;quot; shows the labels associated with the WCU &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; for task 7663. The only label is a [[#System label]] that was automatically added to the WCU when the task was created. This means that there were no other global or private labels associated with this WCU when task 7663 was created.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Illustration &amp;quot;System Label Associated with WCU&amp;quot; shows the labels associated with &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; for task 7664. In addition to the system label, we have the &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot; label. This means that the WCU &amp;quot;johan1&amp;quot; had the label &amp;quot;wicewiki&amp;quot; when task 7664 was created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=&amp;quot;250px&amp;quot; mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu9.png|Label Associated with WCU&lt;br /&gt;
File:Labels add wcu10.png|System Label Associated with WCU&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assignment labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu11.png|thumb|200px|right|Labels Added to Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can not be added to a assignment by a user but the system can add system labels to a assignment if the assignment is either running, pending or stopped pending. These labels are not visible for a result row in the same way as resource labels but are instead accessible if one selects a row and presses the button &amp;quot;View assignment&amp;quot;. An example can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Labels Added to Assignment&amp;quot;. If the WCU software and/or MX4 firmware is changed while a assignment is either running, pending or stopped pending, a system label describing the change will be added to the assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labels in [[Search Tab|Search]] ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu12.png|thumb|200px|Search Tab Label Widget]]&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Search Tab|search tab]] has a new labels widget as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Search Tab Label Widge&amp;quot;. This widget works in the same way as for the [[#Labels in Tasks|Tasks tab]]. When searching for labels in the [[Search Tab|search tab]] we are searching for labels in the same way as for the tasks tab, e.g labels that were associated with WCUs and/or cars when the tasks were created. If we include system labels in the label search criteria, we are also including assignment labels among the the resource types we are searching in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br clear=&amp;quot;all&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administer labels ==&lt;br /&gt;
In the [[The Portal Administrator View#The Administration Tab]] there is a &amp;quot;Labels&amp;quot; tab where users can administrate their private labels and administrators can administrate all labels in the system. Here it is possible to search for labels either by label name, creator or status both in terms of global/private and enabled/disabled. The status based search is based on a checkbox which has three modes: unselected, checked or unchecked. The checked and unchecked option initiates a search matching the selected choice. However, the default setting is unselected, which is represented by a gray checkbox, and it shows hits disregarding its status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Enable/disable labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu13.png|thumb|200px|Enable/Disable Label]]&lt;br /&gt;
Labels can be enabled or disabled by checking/unchecking the checkbox in the &amp;quot;Enabled&amp;quot; column as can be seen in Figure &amp;quot;Enable/Disable Label&amp;quot;. The changes are instant when checking the checkbox. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Disabled labels can not be added to resources and are not visible in the &amp;quot;Search by labels&amp;quot; widgets. They are however visible when when hovering a resource in the Tasks tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rename label ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Labels add wcu14.png|thumb|200px|Edit Label Dialog]]&lt;br /&gt;
A label can be renamed by clicking the label in the labels grid. An &amp;quot;Edit label&amp;quot; window will popup as can be seen in illustration &amp;quot;Edit Label Dialog&amp;quot;. To rename the label, simply edit the text box and click save. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Administrator specific features ===&lt;br /&gt;
As an administrator there are some more features in the labels administration tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Show all private labels ====&lt;br /&gt;
When checking the &amp;quot;Show all private labels&amp;quot; checkbox, all private labels in the system will be visible when searching. In this way, an administrator can edit other users private labels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Turn private label global ====&lt;br /&gt;
When clicking a label (as described in [[#Rename label]]) an administrator can choose to turn a private label global. This has to be done with some care since it is not possible to turn a global label private again.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Enabled values.png|thumb|Enable values for existing labels]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Enable values for label ====&lt;br /&gt;
Values for an existing label can be added by checking &amp;quot;Enable values&amp;quot; in the Edit label dialog. Note that when values has been enabled, this can not be disabled again.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Mathias</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>